CN114765840B - Communication method and device - Google Patents

Communication method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN114765840B
CN114765840B CN202110183755.XA CN202110183755A CN114765840B CN 114765840 B CN114765840 B CN 114765840B CN 202110183755 A CN202110183755 A CN 202110183755A CN 114765840 B CN114765840 B CN 114765840B
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
terminal
drx
configuration information
parameters
parameter
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
CN202110183755.XA
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN114765840A (en
Inventor
张梦晨
才宇
徐海博
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to PCT/CN2021/137070 priority Critical patent/WO2022151885A1/en
Publication of CN114765840A publication Critical patent/CN114765840A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN114765840B publication Critical patent/CN114765840B/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0229Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal where the received signal is a wanted signal
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/12Wireless traffic scheduling
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The application provides a communication method and a device, wherein the method can be applied to a first terminal and comprises the following steps: obtaining first configuration information, wherein the first configuration information comprises: the method comprises the steps of receiving DRX parameters and a first time interval, wherein the DRX parameters are used for communication between a first terminal and network equipment, the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the step of receiving downlink control information by the first terminal and the step of sending side control information to a second terminal, the first configuration information is sent to the second terminal, the first configuration information is used for obtaining second DRX parameters of the second terminal, and the second DRX parameters are used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.

Description

Communication method and device
Cross Reference to Related Applications
The present application claims priority from the chinese patent office, application number 202110051206.7, application name "a communication method and apparatus" filed on day 14 of 2021, 01, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
Technical Field
The embodiment of the application relates to the technical field of communication, in particular to a communication method and device.
Background
The Sidelink (SL) is a communication from terminal to terminal. In the side-link, the transmitting end sends information to the receiving end via a physical layer side control channel (PSCCH), where the PSCCH is used to carry side-control information (sidelink control information, SCI), and the SCI includes parameters required for demodulating and decoding a physical layer side-line shared channel (PHYSICAL SIDELINK SHARED CHANNEL, PSSCH), and the PSSCH is used to carry data. The receiving end acquires parameters required by demodulation and decoding PSSCH through blind detection of PSCCH sent by the sending end, and then receives the PSSCH.
In the prior art, a terminal needs to monitor or blindly detect PSCCH sent by other terminals all the time, so that great power consumption is brought to the terminal.
Disclosure of Invention
The embodiment of the application provides a communication method and a communication device, which are used for reducing the power consumption of a terminal on a side link.
In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a first terminal, including: obtaining first configuration information, wherein the first configuration information comprises: the method comprises the steps of receiving downlink control information by a first terminal and sending side control information to a second terminal, sending first configuration information to the second terminal, wherein the first configuration information is used for obtaining parameters of second DRX of the second terminal, and the parameters of the second DRX are used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
By the method, after the first terminal and the second terminal are connected, the first terminal can send second configuration information to the second terminal, so that the second terminal configures the second DRX parameter (SL DRX parameter) of the second terminal based on the first DRX parameter (Uu DRX parameter) of the first terminal, the second terminal can receive SCI sent by the first terminal in the activated period of Uu DRX in the activated period of SL DRX, and when the SL DRX and the Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal by the network equipment is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of resource scheduling are improved.
One possible implementation manner, the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the first configuration information.
By the method, the relation between the parameters of the first DRX and the parameters of the second DRX can be determined through the first time interval, so that the parameters of the second DRX are better configured.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
Considering that the parameters of the first DRX are expressed based on the system frame number and the parameters of the second DRX are expressed based on the direct frame number, the second terminal may be caused to convert the DRX parameters of the first terminal expressed based on the system frame number SFN into the DRX parameters of the first terminal expressed based on the DFN by transmitting a slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN, so as to determine the parameters of the second DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: and based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN, wherein the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN is obtained through the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the SFN.
By the method, the first terminal can determine the DRX parameter of the first terminal based on the DFN representation, and the overhead of the second terminal is saved.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving first indication information from the second terminal, wherein the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with the other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a lateral mode, and N is a positive integer.
By the method, the first terminal can also judge whether the second terminal determines whether the second DRX parameter is more suitable or not based on the first DRX parameter according to the first indication information, so that the allocation of resources can be better optimized.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and when the second terminal and other terminals are laterally connected, receiving fourth configuration information from the second terminal, wherein the fourth configuration information is used for indicating the DRX parameters of the other terminals, and the DRX parameters of the other terminals are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminals.
By the method, the first terminal can also determine the side uplink between the second terminal and other terminals according to the fourth configuration information, so as to determine whether the second terminal determines that the parameters of the second DRX are more suitable based on the parameters of the first DRX.
A possible implementation manner, sending first configuration information to the second terminal includes: and sending the first configuration information to the second terminal according to the first indication information or the fourth configuration information.
By the method, the first terminal can judge that the second terminal is more suitable for determining the parameters of the second DRX based on the parameters of the first DRX according to the first indication information or the fourth configuration information, so that the utilization rate of resource allocation is improved.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message. Thus, the overhead of signaling can be saved.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending second adjustment information to the network equipment, wherein the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network equipment to adjust the parameter of the first DRX, receiving the adjusted parameter of the first DRX from the network equipment, and determining the adjusted parameter of the first DRX according to the second adjustment information.
By the method, the second adjustment information can be sent through the first terminal, so that the network equipment adjusts the parameters of the first DRX, and the parameters of UuDRX and the parameters of SL DRX are matched, so that the resource scheduling efficiency and the resource utilization rate of the network equipment are improved.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and receiving first adjustment information from the second terminal, wherein the first adjustment information is used for requesting to adjust the parameter of the first DRX.
By the method, the first adjustment information can be sent through the second terminal, so that the network equipment adjusts the parameter of the first DRX, and the parameter UuDRX is matched with the parameter of the SL DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
By the method, the network equipment can be based on more information, and the matching effect between the parameters of UuDRX and the parameters of SL DRX is improved.
One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the second adjustment information. One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information. By the method, the expenditure of signaling can be saved.
In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a first terminal, including: transmitting second configuration information to the network device, the second configuration information comprising: and the second configuration information is used for requesting to obtain parameters of third DRX, the parameters of the third DRX are determined by the network equipment based on the second configuration information, the parameters of the first DRX are used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment, and the parameters of the third DRX from the network equipment are received.
By the method, the second configuration information can be sent to the network equipment, and the parameters of the third DRX are configured by the network equipment based on the parameters of the second DRX. Therefore, the parameters of the third DRX can be matched with the parameters of the fourth DRX, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the activation period of the third DRX in the activation period of the fourth DRX, and when the fourth DRX and the third DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment to the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the resource scheduling performance and the resource utilization rate are improved.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the third DRX is determined by the network device based on the second configuration information and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal.
By the method, the relation between the parameters of the third DRX and the parameters of the fourth DRX can be determined through the first time interval, so that the parameters of the third DRX are better configured.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and receiving first indication information from the second terminal, wherein the first indication information is used for indicating whether the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a side-by-side manner. And sending the second configuration information to the network equipment according to the first indication information.
By the method, the first terminal can judge whether the parameter based on the first DRX is more suitable or not according to the first indication information, so that the allocation of resources can be better optimized.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with the other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a lateral mode, and N is a positive integer.
By the method, the connection state of the second terminal and other terminals can be indicated more flexibly according to the needs, and the indication efficiency is improved.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending the first indication information to the network equipment.
By the method, the first terminal can also send the first indication information to the network equipment, so that the network equipment can refer to the first indication information to better configure the corresponding DRX parameters. For example, when the network device is required to configure the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal, the network device may configure the parameters of Uu DRX for the first terminal with reference to the first indication information. When the network device is required to configure parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal, the network device may configure parameters of SLDRX for the second terminal with reference to the first indication information.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and when the second terminal and other terminals are laterally connected, receiving fourth configuration information from the second terminal, wherein the fourth configuration information is used for indicating the DRX parameters of the other terminals, and the DRX parameters of the other terminals are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminals.
By the method, the first terminal can judge whether the second terminal determines the parameters of the second DRX to be more suitable or not based on the parameters of the first DRX based on the fourth configuration information, so that the allocation of resources can be better optimized.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending the fourth configuration information to the network equipment.
By the method, the first terminal can also send the fourth configuration information to the network equipment, so that the network equipment can refer to the fourth configuration information to better configure the corresponding DRX parameters. For example, when the network device is required to configure the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal, the network device may configure the Uu DRX parameters for the first terminal with reference to the fourth configuration information. When the network device is required to configure parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal, the network device may configure parameters of SLDRX for the second terminal with reference to the fourth configuration information.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message. Thus, signaling overhead may be saved.
In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a second terminal, including:
Receiving first configuration information from a first terminal, the first configuration information comprising: the method comprises the steps of sending a second DRX parameter of a second terminal to a first terminal, wherein the second DRX parameter is determined according to first configuration information, and the second DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
After the first terminal and the second terminal are connected, the second terminal configures the second DRX parameter (SL DRX parameter) of the second terminal based on the first DRX parameter (Uu DRX parameter) of the first terminal, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the Uu DRX activation period in the SL DRX activation period, and when the SL DRX and the Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment on the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the resource scheduling performance and the resource utilization rate are improved.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: and based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN, wherein the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN is obtained through the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the SFN.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: transmitting first indication information to the first terminal, wherein the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with the other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a lateral mode, and N is a positive integer.
By the method, the first terminal can judge whether the second DRX parameter is more suitable or not according to the first indication information, so that the allocation of resources can be better optimized.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and when the second terminal and other terminals are laterally connected, sending fourth configuration information of the second terminal to the first terminal, wherein the fourth configuration information is used for indicating the DRX parameters of the other terminals, and the DRX parameters of the other terminals are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminals.
By the method, the first terminal can also determine the side uplink between the second terminal and other terminals according to the fourth configuration information, so that whether the second terminal determines that the parameters of the second DRX are more suitable based on the parameters of the first DRX or not is determined.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message. Thus, the overhead of signaling can be saved.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending first adjustment information to the first terminal, wherein the first adjustment information is used for requesting to adjust the parameter of the first DRX.
By the method, the first adjustment information can be sent to the first terminal, so that the network equipment adjusts the parameter of the first DRX, and the parameter UuDRX is matched with the parameter of the SL DRX, so that the resource scheduling efficiency and the resource utilization rate of the network equipment are improved.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
By the method, the first adjustment information can be sent through the second terminal, so that the network equipment adjusts the parameter of the first DRX, and the parameter UuDRX is matched with the parameter of the SL DRX.
One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information. Thus, signaling overhead is saved.
In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a communication method applied to a second terminal, including: the method comprises the steps that first indication information is sent to the first terminal, the first indication information is used for the first terminal to send second configuration information to network equipment according to the first indication information, and the second configuration information comprises: and the fourth DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal, the second configuration information is used for requesting to obtain the third DRX parameter, the third DRX parameter is determined by the network equipment based on the second configuration information, and the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment.
By the method, the first indication information can be sent to the first terminal, so that the first terminal can send the second configuration information to the network equipment, and the network equipment configures the parameters of the third DRX based on the parameters of the second DRX. Therefore, the parameters of the third DRX can be matched with the parameters of the fourth DRX, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the activation period of the third DRX in the activation period of the fourth DRX, and when the fourth DRX and the third DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment to the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the resource scheduling performance and the resource utilization rate are improved.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the third DRX is determined by the network device based on the second configuration information and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal.
By the method, the relation between the parameters of the third DRX and the parameters of the fourth DRX can be determined through the first time interval, so that the parameters of the third DRX are better configured.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with the other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a lateral mode, and N is a positive integer.
By the method, the connection state of the second terminal and other terminals can be indicated more flexibly according to the needs, and the indication efficiency is improved.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending the first indication information to the network equipment through the first terminal.
By the method, the first terminal can also send the first indication information to the network equipment, so that the network equipment can refer to the first indication information to better configure the corresponding DRX parameters. For example, when the network device is required to configure the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal, the network device may configure the parameters of Uu DRX for the first terminal with reference to the first indication information. When the network device is required to configure parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal, the network device may configure parameters of SLDRX for the second terminal with reference to the first indication information.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and when the second terminal and other terminals are laterally connected, sending fourth configuration information to the first terminal, wherein the fourth configuration information is used for indicating the DRX parameters of the other terminals, and the DRX parameters of the other terminals are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminals.
By the method, the first terminal can judge whether the second DRX parameter is more suitable or not based on the fourth configuration information by the second terminal, so that the allocation of resources can be better optimized.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending the fourth configuration information to the network equipment through the first terminal.
By the method, the first terminal can also send the fourth configuration information to the network equipment, so that the network equipment can refer to the fourth configuration information to better configure the corresponding DRX parameters. For example, when the network device is required to configure the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal, the network device may configure the Uu DRX parameters for the first terminal with reference to the fourth configuration information. When the network device is required to configure parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal, the network device may configure parameters of SLDRX for the second terminal with reference to the fourth configuration information.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message. Thus, signaling overhead is saved.
In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, including:
Transmitting a first DRX parameter to a first terminal, wherein the first DRX parameter is used for the first terminal to obtain first configuration information, and the first configuration information comprises: the method comprises the steps of obtaining a first DRX parameter and a first time interval, wherein the first DRX parameter is used for communication between a first terminal and network equipment, the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between receiving downlink control information by the first terminal and sending side control information to a second terminal, the first configuration information is used for obtaining a second DRX parameter of the second terminal, the second DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the second DRX parameter from the second terminal is received.
By the method, the network device can send the parameter of the first DRX to the first terminal, so that after the first terminal and the second terminal are connected, the first terminal can send the second configuration information to the second terminal, so that the second terminal configures the parameter of the second DRX (parameter of SL DRX) of the second terminal based on the parameter of the first DRX (parameter of Uu DRX) of the first terminal, the second terminal can receive SCI sent by the first terminal in the activation period of Uu DRX in the activation period of SLDRX, and when SL DRX and Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the network device is convenient for scheduling side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal, and the resource scheduling performance and the resource utilization rate are improved.
One possible implementation, the parameter of the second DRX is determined based on the first configuration information.
By the method, the relation between the parameters of the first DRX and the parameters of the second DRX can be determined through the first time interval, so that the parameters of the second DRX are better configured.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first discontinuous reception DRX include: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: and based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN, wherein the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN is obtained through the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the SFN.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and receiving second adjustment information from the first terminal, wherein the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network equipment to adjust the parameter of the first DRX, and sending the adjusted parameter of the first DRX to the first terminal, and the adjusted parameter of the first DRX is determined according to the second adjustment information.
By the method, the network device can adjust the parameter of the first DRX according to the second adjustment information, so that the parameter UuDRX is matched with the parameter of the SL DRX, and the efficiency of scheduling resources and the resource utilization rate of the network device are improved.
A possible implementation manner, the second adjustment information is determined according to first adjustment information from the second terminal, where the first adjustment information is used to request to adjust a parameter of the first DRX.
By the method, the network device can adjust the parameter of the first DRX based on the first adjustment information from the second terminal, so that the parameter UuDRX is matched with the parameter of the SL DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
By the method, the network equipment improves the matching effect between the parameters of UuDRX and the parameters of SL DRX based on more information.
One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the second adjustment information. One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information. Thus, the overhead of signaling can be saved.
In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, including:
Receiving second configuration information from the first terminal, the second configuration information comprising: and the network equipment determines the parameter of the third DRX based on the second configuration information, the parameter of the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment, and the parameter of the third DRX is sent to the first terminal.
By the method, the network device can configure the parameter of the third DRX based on the second configuration information. Therefore, the parameters of the third DRX can be matched with the parameters of the fourth DRX, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the activation period of the third DRX in the activation period of the fourth DRX, and when the fourth DRX and the third DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment to the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the resource scheduling performance and the resource utilization rate are improved.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the third DRX is determined by the network device based on the second configuration information and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal.
By the method, the relation between the parameters of the third DRX and the parameters of the fourth DRX can be determined through the first time interval, so that the parameters of the third DRX are better configured.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the second configuration information is determined according to first indication information from the second terminal, and the first indication information is used for indicating whether the second terminal is laterally connected with other terminals or not.
By the method, the first terminal can judge that the parameter based on the first DRX is more suitable for determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first indication information, so that the allocation of resources can be better optimized.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with the other terminals in a lateral mode, the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a lateral mode, and N is a positive integer.
By the method, the connection state of the second terminal and other terminals can be indicated more flexibly according to the needs, and the indication efficiency is improved.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and receiving the first indication information from the first terminal.
By the method, the network equipment can refer to the first indication information to better configure the corresponding DRX parameters.
A possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and when the second terminal and other terminals are laterally connected, receiving fourth configuration information from the first terminal, wherein the fourth configuration information is used for indicating the DRX parameters of the other terminals, and the DRX parameters of the other terminals are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminals.
By the method, the network equipment can refer to the fourth configuration information to better configure the corresponding DRX parameters.
One possible implementation manner, the fourth configuration information is obtained by the first terminal through the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message.
In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a first terminal, including: the method comprises the steps of sending first configuration information 1 to network equipment, wherein the first configuration information 1 is used for requesting to obtain parameters of second DRX of a second terminal, the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal, the parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal from the network equipment are received, the parameters of the second DRX are determined according to the parameters of the first DRX, the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment, and the parameters of the second DRX are sent to the second terminal.
By the method, the first terminal can send the first configuration information 1 to the network equipment to request the network equipment to configure the second DRX parameter of the second terminal based on the first DRX parameter of the first terminal, so that the matching of the first DRX parameter and the second DRX parameter is realized through the network equipment, the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the activated period of Uu DRX in the activated period of SL DRX, and when SL DRX and Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment on side link resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of resource scheduling are improved.
In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a first terminal, including: obtaining a first DRX parameter, wherein the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment, determining a second DRX parameter of a second terminal according to the first DRX parameter, wherein the second DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal, and sending the second DRX parameter to the second terminal.
By the method, the first terminal configures the parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal, so that the second terminal can receive SCI sent by the first terminal in the activated period of Uu DRX in the activated period of SL DRX through the matching of the parameters of the first DRX and the parameters of the second DRX of the first terminal, and when SL DRX and Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment on the side link resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of resource scheduling are improved.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the present invention is that the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the parameter of the first DRX and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending side control information to the second terminal.
By the method, the relation between the parameters of the first DRX and the parameters of the second DRX can be determined through the first time interval, so that the parameters of the second DRX are better configured.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending second adjustment information to the network equipment, wherein the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network equipment to adjust the parameter of the first DRX, receiving the adjusted parameter of the first DRX from the network equipment, and determining the adjusted parameter of the first DRX according to the second adjustment information.
By the method, the second adjustment information can be sent through the first terminal, so that the network equipment adjusts the parameters of the first DRX, and the parameters of UuDRX and the parameters of SL DRX are matched, so that the resource scheduling efficiency and the resource utilization rate of the network equipment are improved.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and receiving first adjustment information from the second terminal, wherein the first adjustment information is used for requesting to adjust parameters of a first DRX of the first terminal.
By the method, the first adjustment information can be sent through the second terminal, so that the network equipment adjusts the parameter of the first DRX, and the parameter UuDRX is matched with the parameter of the SL DRX.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the method is that the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
By the method, the network equipment can be based on more information, and the matching effect between the parameters of UuDRX and the parameters of SL DRX is improved.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending fourth adjustment information to the network device, wherein the fourth adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the parameter of the second DRX, receiving the adjusted parameter of the second DRX from the network device, and determining the adjusted parameter of the second DRX according to the fourth adjustment information.
By the method, the fourth adjustment information can be sent through the first terminal, so that the network equipment adjusts the parameters of the second DRX, and the parameters of UuDRX and the parameters of SL DRX are matched, so that the resource scheduling efficiency and the resource utilization rate of the network equipment are improved.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and receiving third adjustment information from the second terminal, wherein the third adjustment information is used for requesting to adjust parameters of a second DRX of the second terminal.
By the method, the third adjustment information can be sent through the second terminal, so that the network equipment adjusts the parameters of the second DRX, and the parameters of UuDRX and the parameters of SL DRX are matched.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the third adjustment information or the fourth adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, or preference information of the parameter of the second DRX.
By the method, the network equipment can be based on more information, and the matching effect between the parameters of UuDRX and the parameters of SL DRX is improved.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving first indication information from the second terminal, wherein the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal does not establish side links with other terminals, the second terminal establishes side links with other terminals, the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a side-by-side manner, and N is a positive integer.
By the method, the first terminal can judge whether the parameter based on the first DRX is more suitable or not according to the first indication information, so that the allocation of resources can be better optimized.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and when the second terminal and other terminals are laterally connected, receiving fourth configuration information from the second terminal, wherein the fourth configuration information is used for indicating the DRX parameters of the other terminals, and the DRX parameters of the other terminals are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminals.
By the method, the first terminal can judge whether the parameter based on the first DRX is more suitable or not according to the fourth configuration information, so that the allocation of resources can be better optimized.
With reference to the seventh aspect or the eighth aspect, one possible implementation manner, at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information or the second adjustment information; or at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information. Thus, the overhead of signaling is saved.
In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a second terminal, including:
Receiving, by a first terminal, a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal from the network device, where the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to a parameter of a first DRX, where the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the network device, and the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a second terminal, including:
And receiving a second DRX parameter of a second terminal sent by the first terminal, wherein the second DRX parameter of the second terminal is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal, the second DRX parameter is determined according to a first DRX parameter, the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment, and the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
With reference to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the method includes that the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the parameter of the first DRX, including: the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the parameter of the first DRX and a first time interval, and the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and transmitting side control information to the second terminal.
With reference to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending first adjustment information to the first terminal, wherein the first adjustment information is used for requesting the network equipment to adjust the parameter of the first DRX.
With reference to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
With reference to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and sending third adjustment information to the first terminal, wherein the third adjustment information is used for requesting the network equipment to adjust the parameter of the second DRX.
With reference to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, or preference information of the parameter of the second DRX.
With reference to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: transmitting first indication information to the first terminal, wherein the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal does not establish side links with other terminals, the second terminal establishes side links with other terminals, the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a side-by-side manner, and N is a positive integer.
With reference to the ninth aspect or the tenth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes:
And when the second terminal and other terminals are laterally connected, sending fourth configuration information to the first terminal, wherein the fourth configuration information is used for indicating the DRX parameters of the other terminals, and the DRX parameters of the other terminals are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminals.
With reference to the ninth or tenth aspect, one possible implementation manner is that at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information or the third adjustment information; or at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information.
In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, including:
Receiving first configuration information 1 from a first terminal, wherein the first configuration information 1 is used for requesting to acquire parameters of second DRX of a second terminal, the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal, the parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal are sent to the first terminal, the parameters of the second DRX are determined according to the parameters of the first DRX, and the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment.
In a twelfth aspect, the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, including:
And sending a first DRX parameter to a first terminal, wherein the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and a network device, receiving a second DRX parameter from a second terminal of the first terminal, wherein the second DRX parameter of the second terminal is determined according to the first DRX parameter, and the second DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
With reference to the eleventh or twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the method includes that the parameters of the second DRX are determined according to the parameters of the first DRX, including: the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the parameter of the first DRX and a first time interval, and the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and transmitting side control information to the second terminal.
With reference to the eleventh or twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and receiving second adjustment information from the first terminal, wherein the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network equipment to adjust the parameter of the first DRX, and sending the adjusted parameter of the first DRX to the first terminal, and the adjusted parameter of the first DRX is determined according to the second adjustment information.
With reference to the eleventh aspect or the twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the second adjustment information is determined according to first adjustment information from the second terminal, where the first adjustment information is used to request to adjust a parameter of a first DRX of the first terminal.
With reference to the eleventh aspect or the twelfth aspect, in a possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
With reference to the eleventh or twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and receiving fourth adjustment information from the first terminal, wherein the fourth adjustment information is used for requesting the network equipment to adjust the parameter of the second DRX, and sending the adjusted parameter of the second DRX to the first terminal, and the adjusted parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the fourth adjustment information.
With reference to the eleventh aspect or the twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the fourth adjustment information is determined according to third adjustment information from the second terminal, where the third adjustment information is used to request to adjust a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal.
With reference to the eleventh aspect or the twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the third adjustment information or the fourth adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, or preference information of the parameter of the second DRX.
With reference to the eleventh or twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving, by the first terminal, first indication information from the second terminal, where the first indication information is used to indicate any one of the following: the second terminal does not establish side links with other terminals, the second terminal establishes side links with other terminals, the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a side-by-side manner, and N is a positive integer.
With reference to the eleventh or twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: and when the second terminal and other terminals are laterally connected, receiving fourth configuration information from the second terminal through the first terminal, wherein the fourth configuration information is used for indicating parameters of DRX of the other terminals, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminals are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminals.
With reference to the eleventh or twelfth aspect, one possible implementation manner is that at least two of the following are located in the same message:
The first indication information, the fourth configuration information or the second adjustment information; or at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information.
The advantages of the eighth to twelfth aspects described above may refer to the advantages of the sixth and seventh aspects, and are not described here again.
With reference to any one of the first aspect to the twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the parameter of the first DRX includes a period of the first DRX, and the parameter of the second DRX includes a period of the second DRX, where the period of the second DRX is a multiple of the period of the first DRX.
By the method, the period of the second DRX can be matched with the period of the first DRX.
With reference to any one of the first aspect to the twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the first aspect, the parameter of the first DRX includes an active period length of the first DRX, and the parameter of the second DRX includes an active period length of the second DRX, where the active period length of the second DRX is greater than or equal to the active period length of the first DRX.
By the method, the activation period length of the second DRX can be matched with the activation period length of the first DRX.
With reference to any one of the first aspect to the twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the second DRX activation period is determined according to the activation period of the first DRX and at least one of the following: and the maximum value of the time intervals in the first time interval and the minimum value of the time intervals in the first time interval.
By the method, the connection between the active period length of the second DRX and the active period length of the first DRX can be established through the first time interval, so that the process of scheduling the sidestream resources is better adapted.
With reference to any one of the first aspect to the twelfth aspect, a possible implementation manner of the second DRX start time is determined according to the first DRX start time and the first time interval.
By the method, the connection between the starting time of the second DRX and the starting time of the first DRX can be established through the first time interval, so that the process of scheduling the sidestream resources is better adapted.
In a thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, which may be a terminal device, or may be a chip for a terminal device. The apparatus has a function of realizing any of the respective realizing methods of the first to fourth aspects and the seventh to tenth aspects. The functions can be realized by hardware, and can also be realized by executing corresponding software by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
In a fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, which may be a network device, or may be a chip for a network device. The apparatus has functions to realize the fifth to sixth or eleventh to twelfth aspects described above. The functions can be realized by hardware, and can also be realized by executing corresponding software by hardware. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the functions described above.
In a fifteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communications apparatus, including a processor and a memory for storing computer-executable instructions, the processor executing the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory when the apparatus is running to cause the apparatus to perform any of the implementation methods of the first to fourth aspects, the seventh to tenth aspects described above.
In a sixteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor and a memory for storing computer-executable instructions, the processor executing the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory when the device is running, to cause the device to perform any of the implementation methods of the fifth to sixth aspects or the eleventh to twelfth aspects described above.
In a seventeenth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a communication device including a unit or means (means) for performing the steps of any of the implementation methods of the first to fourth aspects and the seventh to tenth aspects.
An eighteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device including means for performing the steps of any of the above fifth to sixth aspects or eleventh to twelfth aspects.
In a nineteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and perform any of the implementation methods of the first to fourth aspects, and the seventh to tenth aspects. The processor includes one or more.
In a twentieth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor and an interface circuit, where the processor is configured to communicate with other devices through the interface circuit, and perform any of the implementation methods of the fifth to sixth aspects or the eleventh to twelfth aspects. The processor includes one or more.
In a twenty-first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processor, configured to be connected to a memory, and configured to invoke a program stored in the memory, so as to perform any of the implementation methods of the first to fourth aspects, and the seventh to tenth aspects. The memory may be located within the device or may be located external to the device. And the processor includes one or more.
In a twenty-second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communications device, including a processor, configured to be connected to a memory, and configured to invoke a program stored in the memory, to perform any of the implementation methods of the fifth to sixth aspects or the eleventh to twelfth aspects. The memory may be located within the device or may be located external to the device. And the processor includes one or more.
In a twenty-third aspect, embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium having instructions stored therein, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any of the above-described methods of the first to twelfth aspects, the first to twelfth aspects.
In a twenty-fourth aspect, embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product comprising a computer program which, when run, causes any of the above-described implementation methods of the first to twelfth aspects, the first to twelfth aspects to be performed.
In a twenty-fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, including: a processor, configured to perform any of the foregoing first to twelfth aspects and implementation methods of the first to twelfth aspects.
In a twenty-sixth aspect, embodiments of the present application further provide a communication system, including the first terminal and the second terminal as in the fifteenth, seventeenth, nineteenth or twenty-first aspect, and the network device as in the sixteenth, eighteenth, twentieth or twenty-second aspect.
Drawings
Fig. 1-2 are schematic diagrams of a network architecture to which embodiments of the present application are applicable;
fig. 3a is a schematic diagram of reserved side-uplink resources;
FIG. 3b is a schematic diagram of a DRX cycle;
fig. 3c is a schematic diagram of reserved side-uplink resources;
Fig. 4a is a schematic flow chart of a side uplink resource scheduling according to the present application;
fig. 4b is a schematic diagram of a side uplink resource scheduling according to the present application;
FIG. 4c is a schematic diagram of a system frame number and a direct frame number;
FIG. 4d is a diagram of side-uplink resource scheduling;
fig. 5 a-5 e are schematic diagrams of a side-link DRX configuration according to an embodiment of the present application;
Fig. 6 a-6 c are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
fig. 7 a-7 c are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
fig. 8 a-8 c are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
fig. 9 a-9 c are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
FIGS. 10 a-10 c are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
FIGS. 11 a-11 c are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
Fig. 12 a-12 j are schematic diagrams of DRX configurations of multiple side uplinks according to embodiments of the present application;
fig. 13 a-13 b are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
Fig. 14 a-14 b are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
fig. 15 a-15 b are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
FIGS. 16 a-16 b are schematic flow diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;
Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
Fig. 18 is a schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
Fig. 19-27 are schematic diagrams of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
Detailed Description
The embodiment of the application provides a method and a device for side-link communication, which are used for improving the quality of the side-link communication. The method and the device are based on the same or similar technical conception, and because the principles of solving the problems by the method and the device are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and the repetition is not repeated. In the description of the embodiment of the present application, "and/or" describing the association relationship of the association object indicates that three relationships may exist, for example, a and/or B may indicate: a exists alone, A and B exist together, and B exists alone. The character "/" generally indicates that the context-dependent object is an "or" relationship. At least one in reference to the present application means one or more; plural means two or more. In addition, it should be understood that in the description of the present application, the words "first," "second," "third," and the like are used merely for distinguishing between the descriptions and not be construed as indicating or implying a relative importance or order. Reference in the specification to "one embodiment" or "some embodiments" or the like means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in one or more embodiments of the application. Thus, appearances of the phrases "in one embodiment," "in some embodiments," "in other embodiments," and the like in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment, but mean "one or more but not all embodiments" unless expressly specified otherwise. The terms "comprising," "including," "having," and variations thereof mean "including but not limited to," unless expressly specified otherwise.
The side-link communication method provided by the embodiment of the application can be applied to a fourth-generation (4th generation,4G) communication system, such as long-term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), and can also be applied to a fifth-generation (5th generation,5G) communication system, such as a 5G New Radio (NR). And may be applied to various future communication systems such as the sixth generation (6th generation,6G) communication systems.
Embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
Fig. 1 shows an architecture of one possible communication system to which the side-link communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable, where the communication system may include a network device 103, one or more terminals 101, and one or more terminals 102. It should be understood that more or fewer network devices or terminals may be included in the communication system. The network device or terminal may be hardware, software functionally divided, or a combination of hardware and software. In addition, a plurality of terminals 102 may also constitute a communication system. Communication between the network device and the terminal may be through other devices or network elements. The network device 103 may transmit downlink data to the terminal 101, or may receive uplink data transmitted by the terminal 101. Of course, the terminal 101 may transmit uplink data to the network device 103, or may receive downlink data transmitted by the network device 103. Communication may be performed between terminal 101 and terminal 102, and the link between terminal 101 and terminal 102 is referred to as a sidelink.
The terminal 102, which may be referred to as a User Equipment (UE), a Mobile Station (MS), a Mobile Terminal (MT), a terminal device, etc., is a device that provides voice or data connectivity to a user, and may also be an internet of things device. For example, the terminal 102 includes a handheld device, an in-vehicle device, and the like having a wireless connection function. The terminal 102 may be: a mobile phone), a tablet, a laptop, a palmtop, a mobile internet device (mobile INTERNET DEVICE, MID), a wearable device (e.g., a smart watch, a smart bracelet, a pedometer, etc.), a vehicle-mounted device (e.g., an automobile, a bicycle, an electric car, an airplane, a ship, a train, a high-speed rail, etc.), a Virtual Reality (VR) device, an augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) device, a wireless terminal in an industrial control (industrial control), a smart home device (e.g., a refrigerator, a television, an air conditioner, an electric meter, etc.), a smart robot, a workshop device, a wireless terminal in an unmanned (SELF DRIVING), a wireless terminal in a teleoperation (remote medical surgery), a wireless terminal in a smart grid (SMART GRID), a wireless terminal in a transportation security (transportation safety), a wireless terminal in a smart city (SMART CITY), or a wireless terminal in a smart home (smart home), a flying device (e.g., a smart robot, a hot balloon, an unmanned aerial vehicle, etc.
The side-link communication in embodiments of the present application may be, for example, a Device-to-Device (D2D) communication. The communication between terminals can be directly carried out, so that the communication flow can be simplified, and the communication time delay can be reduced. For example, the side-link communication may also be a vehicle-to-X (V2X) communication with other devices, such as a vehicle-to-vehicle communication (vehicle to vehicle, V2V), a vehicle-to-road communication (vehicle to installation, V2I), a vehicle-to-pedestrian communication (vehicle to pedestrian, V2P).
It should be appreciated that the terminal 101 may be configured to support communication with network devices over the air interface (universal user to network interface, uu air interface) of the general-purpose user and network. Terminals 101 and 102 may be configured to support SL transmissions, e.g., SL communication between terminals 101 and 102 may be via a direct communication (PC 5) air interface (i.e., an air interface for SL communication between terminals). It should be appreciated that in the present application, SL communication may include SL unicast communication, multicast communication, and broadcast communication. Or terminal 101 and terminal 102 may be configured to support relay (relay) transmissions, e.g., terminal 102 may be a remote (remote) communication device and terminal 101 may be a relay terminal device to enable relay transmissions. By way of example, the terminal 101 may be considered as a first communication device, and the communication method provided by the present application is implemented by the first communication device as well as by a second communication device.
Illustratively, the SL connection may be identified in the present application by an identification (or identification information) of the SL connection (connection/connections). Taking the SL connection between terminal 101 and terminal 102 as an example, the identity of the SL connection may include the identity of terminal 101 and/or the identity of terminal 102. Or the identification of the SL connection may include an SL connection identification or an SL link identification of the SL connection (PC 5 LINK IDENTIFIER).
The network device 103 is a node in a radio access network (radio access network, RAN), which may also be referred to as a base station, and may also be referred to as a RAN node (or device). Currently, some examples of network devices 103 are: the network device 103 may also be a satellite or future base station, which may also be referred to as an altitude platform, an aerial vehicle, or a satellite base station (AP), a next generation base station (next generation nodeB, gNB), a next generation evolved base station (next generation evolved nodeB, ng-eNB), a transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), an evolved Node B (eNB), a radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), a Node B (Node B, NB), a base station controller (base station controller, BSC), a base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), a home base station (e.g., home evolved NodeB, or a home Node B, HNB), a baseband unit (BBU), or a wireless fidelity (WIRELESS FIDELITY, wifi) Access Point (AP). Network device 103 may also be a network device in a future possible communication system. In the embodiment of the present application, the network device or the base station may be used to describe the above device. By way of example, the network device 103 may be regarded as a third communication device, and thus the communication method provided by the present application may be implemented by the first communication device, the second communication device, and the third communication device. In addition, the terminal 104 may be regarded as a fourth communication device and the terminal 105 may be regarded as a fifth communication device, so that the communication method provided by the present application may also be implemented by the first communication device, the second communication device, the third communication device, the fourth communication device, and the fifth communication device.
In addition, in fig. 1, the terminal 102 may also communicate with the network device 103 through a Uu interface.
As shown in fig. 2, terminal 102 may perform SL communication with at least one communication device other than terminal 101 through another SL connection in addition to SL communication with terminal 101 through the SL connection. Such as V2X devices or other communication devices supporting SL communication or relay communication.
For example, the terminals 102, 101, and 104 communicate with each other via SL connections. Terminal 102 may also communicate with terminal 105 via a SL connection. Wherein, the terminal 101, the terminal 104 and the terminal 105 can access the same or different network devices respectively. For example, terminals 101 and 104 may access network device 103, or terminal 104 may another network device 106.
Further, in fig. 2, wired and/or wireless communication may be performed between network device 103 and network device 106.
In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following description will explain the terms related to the embodiments of the present application.
1. Time domain resources
In the embodiment of the present application, the time domain resource may include a time unit, where the time unit may be a slot (slot), a mini-slot (mini-slot), a symbol (symbol) or other time domain granularity (such as a system frame and a subframe), and one slot may include at least one symbol, for example, 14 symbols, or 12 symbols.
In 5G NR, one slot may be composed of at least one of a symbol used for downlink transmission, a symbol used for flexible transmission, a symbol used for uplink transmission, and the like, and such a slot composition is called a different Slot Format (SF), and there may be 256 kinds of slot formats at most.
The time slots may have different slot types, and the number of symbols included in different slot types is different, for example, a mini slot (mini slot) contains less than 7 symbols, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, etc., and a common slot (slot) contains 7 symbols or 14 symbols, etc. Each symbol length may be different according to subcarrier spacing, and thus the slot length may be different.
2. Side link (sidelink) resources
The side uplink resource in the embodiment of the present application may also be simply referred to as a resource, or a transmission resource. In the present application, the side link may also be referred to as a side link, or a PC5 interface link, or an inter-terminal device link. In the present application, the transport block (transmission block) may also be referred to as a data packet (DATA PACKET). In the present application, equal to or greater than may also be referred to as equal to or greater than; the smaller than or equal to may also be referred to as smaller than or equal to.
In D2D communication, a side-link resource is a resource for communication between a terminal device and a terminal device. The side-link resources may include side-link resources of a frequency domain and side-link resources of a time domain. From a transmission type perspective, the sidelink resources may include sidelink transmit resources and sidelink receive resources. Wherein the side-uplink transmission resources are used for transmitting information, such as transmission control information and/or data. The side-uplink receive resources are used to receive information, such as receive control information and/or data.
Some possible side-link resource allocation approaches are described below.
The resources used by the side-link communications are typically configured or pre-configured resources. For example, in the LTE system, a part of the uplink communication resource is divided for D2D communication. In NR, the resources used for the side-link communication may also be side-link dedicated resources, for example, side-link dedicated carriers are allocated for the side-link communication, and the terminals for V2X communication may use the side-link dedicated carriers for communication.
This portion of the resources used for side-link communications may be generally referred to as a resource pool. The resource pool contains time-frequency resources that can be used for side-link transmission. For example, taking D2D communication in the LTE system as an example, the resource pool includes an uplink subframe and an uplink frequency band that can be used for D2D communication. As shown in fig. 3a, a schematic diagram of D2D communication resource allocation is given, where the D2D resource pool includes periodically occurring uplink subframes (e.g. hatched portions), and a frequency band for D2D communication in an uplink bandwidth. Furthermore, for different D2D services, the base station may allocate dedicated D2D resources thereto, e.g. a D2D communication resource pool for D2D communication services, a D2D discovery resource pool for D2D discovery services, a D2D synchronization resource pool for D2D synchronization.
In general, the modes of side-uplink resource allocation may include two modes, mode one and mode two, as described below.
Mode one: the terminal performs side-link communication and requires the network device to perform resource allocation. For example, before the terminal performs the sidelink communication, the terminal needs to send a sidelink communication scheduling request to the network device, and after receiving the sidelink communication scheduling request, the network device sends downlink control signaling (downlink control information, DCI) to indicate Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) resources, the terminal sends a sidelink buffer report (BSR, buffer status reporting) to the network device, based on the sidelink BSR, the base station may determine the sidelink communication data size of the terminal, the network device allocates the sidelink communication resources to the terminal, and sends DCI to the terminal to indicate the allocated sidelink communication resources to the terminal. The terminal transmits side uplink control information (sidelink control information, SCI) to the terminal device at the receiving end according to the side uplink communication resource indicated by the DCI, where the SCI carries a resource for indicating the network device to allocate for the side uplink. In addition, the DCI may further indicate an opportunity for the terminal to send the SCI, for example, before the network device schedules the side uplink resource, the network device may configure the gap set for the first terminal, and the network device may send the gap set to the terminal in advance. For example, the base station may configure a gap table (e.g., "sl-DCI-ToSL-Trans") for the first terminal through an RRC message, where the gap table may include 8 gap values configured by the network device for the terminal. The value of gap can be a positive integer. For example, the value of gap may be in the range of [1,32]. Each gap value may represent a corresponding number of time slots. Each time the network device schedules SL communication resources for the terminal, the network device may instruct the terminal to currently schedule the specifically used gap value through DCI. For example, the network device may instruct the network device to take a value of the gap configured for the terminal through one field (e.g., a time gap field) in the DCI. For example, when the gap set includes 8 gap values, the DCI indicates that the length of the gap field may be 3 bits.
The transmission time of the SCI configured by the network device for the terminal can be indicated by the value of the gap indicated by the DCI. Specifically, when configuring the value of the gap for the terminal, the network device may determine the value of the gap according to a time interval between a time when the network device transmits DCI and a time when the terminal transmits SCI. Therefore, after receiving the DCI, the terminal may determine the time for the network device to transmit the DCI according to the time for receiving the DCI and the delay for transmitting the DCI between the network device and the terminal. Furthermore, the terminal may determine the time when the terminal transmits the SCI according to the time when the network device transmits the DCI and the gap value configured by the network device for the terminal.
For example, after receiving DCI, the terminal may determine the time T SL of sending SCI by receiving the time T DL of the DCI and the gap value K SL indicated by the gap field in the DCI, where the specific formula satisfies:
TSCI=TDL-TTA/2+KSL*Tslot
Where T DL represents the time when the terminal receives DCI, K SL represents the value of gap (which may be expressed as the number of slots), and T slot represents the time taken up by one slot (SL slot) of one side uplink. T TA/2 denotes a time due to a delay between a transmission message and a reception message between Uu ports, the magnitude of which is affected by various factors such as a distance between a terminal of a transmitting end and a base station, interference in an environment, or multipath effect, etc. The time can be determined by the synchronization message sent by the base station and the synchronization response message fed back by the terminal after receiving the synchronization message.
It should be noted that, the time T DL when the terminal receives DCI, the time T slot occupied by one SL slot, and the time T SCI when the terminal transmits SCI to the opposite terminal of the side uplink may all be represented by the location of the time domain resource. And the location of the time domain resource may be represented by a frame number and a slot.
For example, the time when the terminal receives DCI may be represented by a system frame number, a subframe number, and a slot number.
Considering that on the Uu port, when the UE communicates with the base station, the UE uses the base station as a synchronization source, and the UE maintains synchronization of a system frame number (SYSTEM FRAME number, SFN) and a subframe (subframe) for the entire communication time between the UE and the base station. As shown in fig. 4c, one SFN has a length of 10ms and total of 0-1023 SFNs, each SFN includes 10 subframes having a length of 1ms and total of 0-9 subframes, and each subframe further includes two slots (slots) having a length of 0.5 ms.
Accordingly, the initial position of the received DCI may be used as the time of the received DCI, for example, a system frame number where the initial position is located, a subframe number on the system frame number, and a slot number on the subframe number.
By the method, since the time of receiving the DCI by the first terminal is based on the time domain position of the system frame number, the time of sending the SCI determined by the terminal of the sending end is also based on the time domain position of the system frame number.
Accordingly, considering that the terminal of the receiving end uses the terminal of the transmitting end as a synchronization source on the PC5 port (interface for communication between the terminal and the terminal), when the terminal of the transmitting end and the terminal of the receiving end perform side-uplink communication, a direct frame Number (DIRECT FRAME Number, DFN) is used to synchronize with the subframe. Each DFN includes 10 subframes, each subframe including 2 slots. Therefore, the terminal of the receiving end can take the initial position of the received SCI as the time of receiving the SCI, for example, a direct frame number where the initial position is located, a subframe number on the direct frame number, and a slot number on the subframe number.
After the terminal at the receiving end receives the SCI, the side uplink resource allocated by the network device for the side uplink can be obtained. Thus, the terminal of the transmitting side and the terminal of the receiving side can perform side-link communication through the side-link resource. For example, the base station uses the configured sidelink radio network temporary identity (Sidelink-RadioNetworkTemporaryIdentifier, SL-RNTI) to schedule transmission resources for the sidelink.
In some embodiments, the base station may configure N resources (N is a positive integer) by transmitting DCI once to the terminal. Accordingly, the terminal may transmit the SCI to the terminal of the opposite end of the side uplink once based on the DCI, for indicating a maximum of N resources configured in the DCI. Wherein, the resources configured in the same SCI can be used for transmitting the same data packet or the same transmission block; or the resources configured in the same SCI may be the first resource to the xth resource for transmitting a data packet or a transport block, the xth+1th resource to the nth resource for transmitting another data packet or another transport block, where X is a positive integer greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to N, and so on, and are not enumerated one by one. Alternatively, N is 3 or any integer greater than 3. Optionally, the SCI may further carry a period value, and then the N resources configured in one SCI may be configured repeatedly with the period value. It should be noted that resources configured in different periods are used for transmitting different transport blocks. For example, N resources in the first period are used for transmission of transport block 1, N resources in the second period are used for transmission of transport block 2, N resources in the third period are used for transmission of transport block 3, and so on. As shown in fig. 3c, a schematic diagram of configured side-uplink resources. There are three side-link resources configured in each period, the side-link resources configured in the first period being used for transmission of transport block 1 (TB 1) and the side-link resources configured in the second period being used for transmission of transport block 2 (TB 2).
Mode two: the terminal does not need the network equipment to allocate resources for the side link communication, but autonomously selects the side link resources from a resource pool preconfigured by the network equipment. For example, the terminal may acquire the side-link resources through a sensing (transmitting) procedure. The terminal will send a SCI notification of the side-link resources used between the terminal with which the side-link is established. The terminal can also obtain the information occupied by other terminal resources by decoding SCIs sent by other terminals or performing side uplink measurement, and the terminal can select resources not occupied by other terminals according to the result of sending. Wherein the SL measurement is based on a value (SIDELINK REFERENCE SIGNAL RECEIVED power, SL-RSRP) of the received power of the side-link reference signal obtained when decoding the SCI.
It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application mainly discuss in-mode communication regarding side-link resource allocation in mode one. The allocation manners of the side uplink resources appearing later can refer to the allocation manners of the side uplink resources of the usage mode one, and are described in detail herein.
3. Discontinuous reception (Discontinuous Reception, DRX) mechanism for downlink
In Uu port communication between a terminal device and a network device, a DRX mechanism is introduced in order to save power for the terminal device. DRX means that the terminal does not necessarily continuously receive the link message, but discontinuously receives the link message according to a certain rule.
Taking downlink as an example, the terminal may periodically receive downlink messages, taking as an example that the terminal device in radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connected state configures one Uu DRX cycle. As shown in fig. 3b, the Uu DRX cycle consists of "On Duration (wake-up period or wake-up time or active period or Duration or start-up Duration)" and "Opportunity for DRX (sleep period or sleep time)", during which the terminal device listens to and receives the physical downlink control channel (Physical Downlink Control Channel, PDCCH); during the "Opportunity for DRX" time, the terminal device does not receive the data of the PDCCH to save power consumption. The wake-up period in the Uu DRX cycle may be configured by signaling DRX-onduration timer.
Hereinafter, uu DRX is used to denote that a terminal performs DRX transmission of Uu interface with a network device. For example, in fig. 1, if the terminal 101 communicates with the network device 103 through the Uu interface, when DRX is used, the Uu DRX configuration of the terminal 101 may include the DRX configuration of the Uu interface. In addition, the present application may include that the terminal communicates with a plurality of network devices through Uu interfaces, and then parameters of Uu DRX of the terminal may include parameters of DRX employed by each Uu link for transmission.
Parameters for Uu DRX for a set of terminals may include, but are not limited to: one or more parameters of Uu DRX start duration timer (DRX-onduration timer), uu DRX start position (DRX-StartOffset), DRX long cycle (DRX-LongCycle), uu DRX short cycle (DRX-ShortCycle), uu DRX long cycle start position (DRX-LongCycleStartOffset), uu DRX short cycle timer (DRX-ShortCycleTimer), uu DRX slot offset (DRX-SlotOffset), uu DRX inactivity timer (DRX-Inactigytimer), uu DRX downlink retransmission timer (DRX-RetransmissionTimerDL), uu DRX uplink retransmission timer (DRX-RetransmissionTimerUL), or Uu DRX downlink hybrid automatic repeat request (hybrid automatic repeat request, HARQ) Round Trip Time (RTT) timer (DRX-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL), uu uplink HARQ RTT timer (DRX-HARQ-RTT-TimerUL).
The parameters of Uu DRX are specifically described below.
Referring to fig. 3b, a Uu DRX Cycle is schematically illustrated, from which it can be seen that in the time domain, time is divided into successive Uu DRX cycles (DRX cycles). The Uu DRX cycle may include an active period (on duration) and a sleep period. In one DRX Cycle, a DRX Cycle may be used to specify how many subframes/ms a Uu DRX Cycle occupies, a Uu DRX start offset (DRX-StartOffset) may be used to specify a start subframe of an on duration in the Uu DRX Cycle, and a Uu DRX slot offset (DRX-SlotOffset) may be used to specify a start position of the on duration in the Uu DRX Cycle at a slot granularity, which may be 1/32 ms. Therefore, after the initial offset on the granularity of the subframe is determined through the DRX-StartOffset, the initial offset on the granularity of the time slot is determined through the DRX-SlotOffset, and then the initial position of the Uu DRX period can be determined. At this time, the start position of the Uu DRX cycle is also the start position of the active period of Uu DRX. The duration of the active period of Uu DRX is determined by a DRX-onduration timer, which specifies the number of consecutive subframes/ms (i.e. the number of subframes/ms the active period lasts) that the PDCCH needs to be monitored from the start subframe of the on duration in the Uu DRX cycle.
The choice of DXR cycle involves a balance between battery savings and delay. In one aspect, longer DRX cycles are beneficial for extending battery life of the terminal device; for example, web browsing, when a user is reading a web page that has been downloaded, resources are wasted if the terminal device continues to receive downlink data at this time. In another aspect, a shorter DRX cycle facilitates faster response when there is new data transmission. For example, the terminal device requests another web page or voice over internet protocol (voice over internet protocol, voIP). To meet the above requirements, each terminal device may configure two DRX cycles: short DRX Cycle (short DRX Cycle) and long DRX Cycle (long DRX Cycle).
Under different Uu DRX cycles, taking the activation period "on duration" as an example, the start offset of the Uu DRX cycle may be represented by a system frame number and a subframe number (subframe number).
When a Short period is used, DRX-StartOffset specifies the start subframe/millisecond of the DRX Cycle, and DRX-Short Cycle specifies how many subframes/millisecond it takes up. The start duration timer DRX-onduration timer specifies the number of consecutive subframes/ms (i.e. the number of subframes during which the active period lasts) that need to listen to the PDCCH from the starting subframe of the Uu DRX cycle. One possible implementation, uu DRX start offset satisfies:
[(SFN×10)+subframe number]modulo(DRX-ShortCycle)=(DRX-StartOffset)modulo(DRX-ShortCycle);
wherein [1] module [2] represents that the [1] is subjected to the modulo operation by [2], and the result after the modulo operation can be either upward rounding or downward rounding, and is not limited herein. DRX-ShortCycle and DRX-StartOffset are known parameters.
For example, if the value of DRX-ShortCycle is 200 ms and DRX-StartOffset is 98 ms, then (DRX-StartOffset) module (DRX-ShortCycle) is 98 according to the above equation. Therefore, the value of [ (SFN×10) +subframe number ] should be 98+200×n. n is the period involved in taking the modulus. When the minimum period value is selected, it can be determined that the system frame number SFN where the DRX-StartOffset is located is 29 and the subframe number subframe is 8.
When using a long period, DRX-StartOffset specifies the start subframe/millisecond of the DRX Cycle, and long DRX Cycle specifies how many subframes/millisecond a long DRX Cycle takes, both parameters being specified by the longDRX-CycleStartOffset field. The timer DRX-onduration timer specifies the number of consecutive subframes/ms (i.e. the number of subframes during which the active period lasts) that need to listen to the PDCCH from the starting subframe of the Uu DRX cycle. The DRX start offset satisfies:
[(SFN×10)+subframe number]modulo(DRX-LongCycle)=DRX-StartOffset;
wherein [1] module [2] represents the modulo operation of [1] with [2], and DRX-LongCycle and DRX-StartOffset are known parameters.
In general, when a terminal device is scheduled and receives or transmits data in a certain subframe, it is likely to continue to be scheduled in the next several subframes, and if it is to wait for the next DRX cycle to receive or transmit the data, an additional delay will be incurred. Thus, to reduce such delay, the terminal device, after being scheduled, will stay in the active period, i.e. will continue to monitor the PDCCH for the configured active period. The implementation mechanism is as follows: each time the terminal device is scheduled to initially transmit data, a DRX inactivity timer (DRXInactivityTimer) is started (or restarted, or enabled) and the terminal device will be active until the timer times out. DRXInactivityTimer specifies the number of consecutive subframes in active state after the terminal device successfully decodes a PDCCH indicating the initially transmitted Uplink (UL) or Downlink (DL) user data. I.e. the timer is restarted once every time the terminal device has primary data scheduled. It should be noted that, here, the initial transmission is not the retransmission. Primary transmission refers to the first transmission of a certain Transport Block (TB); retransmission refers to each retransmission of the same transport block after the first transmission.
For retransmission procedures, DRX may also include the following parameters:
For each downlink HARQ process other than the broadcast process: a downlink retransmission timer (DRX-RetransmissionTimerDL) may be set, which is used to indicate the maximum duration before the UE receives the downlink retransmission data of the Uu port, that is, when the downlink retransmission timer is started, the UE may start an action of receiving the downlink retransmission data.
In consideration of possible conflict between new transmission data and retransmission data, a downlink HARQ round trip time timer (DRX-HARQ-RTT-TimerDL) can be set, and before the downlink HARQ round trip time timer is started until overtime, the base station does not carry out downlink retransmission on the data packet which is failed to be transmitted currently, and correspondingly, the UE stops receiving the downlink retransmission data of the data packet. After the downlink HARQ round trip delay timer is overtime, the base station performs downlink retransmission on the data packet which is failed to be transmitted currently, and correspondingly, the UE continues to receive downlink retransmission data of the data packet, namely, the DRX-RetransmissionTimerDL is started.
For each uplink HARQ process, an uplink retransmission timer (DRX-RetransmissionTimerUL) may be set, where the uplink retransmission timer is used to indicate the maximum duration before the UE receives the uplink retransmission resource of the Uu port, i.e. the UE starts the downlink retransmission timer until the time-out is reached, and performs uplink data retransmission.
In consideration of possible conflict between new transmission data and retransmission data, an uplink HARQ round trip time timer (DRX-HARQ-RTT-TimerUL) can be set, and before the downlink HARQ round trip time timer is started until overtime, the UE can not carry out uplink retransmission on the data packet with current transmission failure, and correspondingly, the base station stops receiving uplink retransmission data of the data packet. After the uplink HARQ round trip delay timer is overtime, the terminal performs uplink retransmission on the data packet which is failed to be transmitted currently, and correspondingly, the base station continues to receive uplink retransmission data of the data packet, namely, the DRX-RetransmissionTimerUL is started.
In the application, the on duration in Uu DRX period belongs to the active period, the timer working period after DRXInactivityTimer is started also belongs to the active period, the timer working period after DRX-RetransmissionTimerDL is started also belongs to the active period, and the timer working period after DRX-RetransmissionTimerUL is started also belongs to the active period.
In addition, the active period in the Uu DRX cycle may also be a timer working period used for the UE waiting to obtain access resources of the base station in the random access procedure. For example ra-ContentionResolutionTimer or msgB-ResponseWindow.
The active period of the Uu DRX cycle may also be the time at which the UE has sent a scheduling request (scheduling request, SR) on PUCCH and the SR is currently in pending state (the UE is ready but has not yet sent an SR to the network device).
The active period in the Uu DRX cycle may also be a time when the UE successfully receives a Random Access Response (RAR) corresponding to a random access preamble (preamble) of the contention based random access, but does not receive a PDCCH indicating a primary transmission (using a Cell radio network temporary identity ((Cell-RadioNetworkTemporaryIdentifier, C-RNTI)).
The parameters of the DRX in the embodiment of the present application may also include a DRX pattern (DRX pattern), a DRX cycle (DRX cycle), a DRX cycle set (DRX cycle set), a DRX index (DRX index), a DRX identifier, or DRX.
In the present application, the subframe may be replaced by a slot (slot) or a mini slot, without limitation.
In an embodiment of the present application, the pre-configured DRX mode may be configured for the side-link by the network device through signaling, which may be, for example, radio resource control (Radio Resource Control, RRC) signaling, or medium access control (medium access control, MAC) signaling.
4. Discontinuous reception (Discontinuous Reception, DRX) mechanism for side links
After acquiring the side link resource, when the terminal at the receiving end performs side link communication, it needs to monitor the PSCCH of other terminals, and according to the SCI in the PSCCH of other terminals, it can demodulate and decode the PSCCH sent by other terminals to obtain the data in the PSCCH sent by other terminals, so as to complete the side link communication. The terminal of the receiving end needs to blindly detect the PSCCH sent by other terminals, and if the terminal of the receiving end blindly detects or monitors the PSCCH all the time, great power consumption is brought to the terminal of the receiving end. In order to reduce the high energy consumption caused by the continuous monitoring of the PSCCH by the terminal of the receiving end, DRX can be introduced into the side uplink, the terminal of the sending end can periodically send the side uplink information, and the terminal of the receiving end can periodically receive the side uplink information. The terminal of the transmitting end transmits the side uplink message during the active period of one cycle and stops transmitting the side uplink message during the inactive period of one cycle. The terminal of the receiving end receives the side uplink message during the active period of one cycle and stops receiving the side uplink message during the inactive period of one cycle. In this way, the terminal at the receiving end can not need to continuously receive the side uplink message, so that power consumption can be saved. Correspondingly, the terminal of the receiving end receives the side uplink message including the PSCCH and/or the PSSCH.
For example, in fig. 1, when the terminal 102 and the terminal 101 communicate with each other via the PC5 interface and DRX is also used for the side link, parameters of DRX for the side link may be configured for the terminal 102 and the terminal 101. In order to distinguish the parameters of Uu DRX of the terminal 101 on the downlink, the parameters of side DRX between the terminal 101 and the terminal 102 may also be referred to as parameters of SL DRX of the terminal 102, and the parameters of SL DRX of the terminal 102 are used to represent parameters of DRX used when side downlink communication is performed between the terminal 101 and the terminal 102.
Parameters for SL DRX for a set of terminals may include, but are not limited to, one or more of the following: SL DRX start duration timer (DRX-onDurationTimerSL), SL DRX start offset (DRX-startOffsetSL), SL DRX slot offset (DRX-slotOffsetSL), SL DRX inactivity timer (DRX-INACTIVITYTIMERSL), SL DRX retransmission timer (DRX-RetransmissionTimerSL), SL DRX long cycle start position (DRX-LongCycleStartOffsetSL), SL DRX long cycle (DRX-LongCycleSL), SL DRX short cycle (DRX-ShortCycleSL), SL DRX short cycle timer (DRX-ShortCycleTimerSL) or SL DRX hybrid automatic repeat request (hybrid automatic repeat request, HARQ) Round Trip Time (RTT) timer (DRX-HARQ-RTT-TimerSL), etc. The parameters of the SL DRX may refer to the parameters of Uu DRX, and are not described herein.
Note that since synchronization of the side links is based on direct frame number synchronization, the SL DRX start offset is determined based on the direct frame number and the subframe number.
For example, under a different SLDRX period, taking the activation period of "on duration" as an example, the SL DRX start offset may be represented by a direct frame number and a subframe number (subframe number), for example, when a short period is used, the SL DRX start offset satisfies:
[(DFN×10)+subframe number]modulo(DRX-ShortCycleSL)=(DRX-StartOffsetSL)modulo(DRX-ShortCycle);
Wherein [1] module [2] represents performing a modulo operation on [1] with [2 ].
When using long periods, the SL DRX start offset satisfies:
[(DFN×10)+subframe number]modulo(DRX-LongCycleSL)=DRX-StartOffsetSL;
wherein DRX-ShortCycle/DRX-LongCycle and DRX-StartOffset are known parameters.
The specific process may refer to the determination manner of the system frame number and the subframe number corresponding to the initial offset of Uu DRX, which is not described herein.
Considering that DRX is used simultaneously in both downlink and side-link, e.g. the first terminal has established a downlink with the network device, the network device may configure Uu DRX of the first terminal for the downlink between the first terminal and the network device. The first terminal periodically initiates communication with the network device during an active period of Uu DRX of the first terminal. The first terminal establishes a side-uplink with the second terminal, after which the SL DRX of the second terminal may be configured accordingly. The present application is not limited to the execution subject of SL DRX configuring the second terminal, and may be the first terminal, the second terminal, or the network device. The first terminal periodically initiates communication with the second terminal during the active period of the SL DRX, and the second terminal periodically initiates communication with the first terminal during the active period of the SL DRX.
As shown in fig. 4b, which is a schematic diagram of Uu DRX of the first terminal and SL DRX of the second terminal, when the base station schedules SL communication resources, the base station may instruct the terminal to schedule the SL communication resources for the first terminal based on the parameters of Uu DRX and parameters of SL DRX. The scheduling flow is as shown in fig. 4a, and includes:
s1, a first terminal reports an SR request to a base station.
Wherein the SR is used to request communication resources of a side uplink between the first terminal and the second terminal.
The SR may be reported to the base station when the first terminal and the second terminal have a SL data communication requirement, or may be reported to the base station in advance, which is not limited herein.
S2, the base station sends DCI to the first terminal in the activated period of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
The DCI may be used to indicate a time-frequency resource location of SL resources configured by the network device for the first terminal.
Accordingly, after the first terminal receives the DCI, the time-frequency resource location of the SL resource between the first terminal and the second terminal may be determined.
It should be noted that, in order to ensure normal communication between the first terminal and the second terminal, the network device should be in an active state in a time domain time corresponding to a time-frequency resource configured by the first terminal and the second terminal. Thus, the time domain resources of the time-frequency resources scheduled by the network device for the first terminal and the second terminal are configured based on the parameters of the SL DRX between the first terminal and the second terminal.
In addition, the DCI may be further used to instruct the network device to configure a gap value K SL for the first terminal.
And S3, the first terminal sends the SCI to the second terminal at the designated time domain position according to the DCI.
Wherein the SCI is for indicating a side-link resource between a first terminal and a second terminal scheduled by the network device. The time T SCI when the first terminal transmits the SCI is determined according to the gap value K SL indicated by the DCI and the time T DL when the DCI is received. The specific determination manner may be according to the determination manner of T SCI described above, which is not described herein.
S4, the first terminal and the second terminal conduct side-link communication.
The second terminal communicates with the first terminal on the sidelink according to the sidelink resources scheduled by the network device indicated in the SCI.
For example, the first terminal transmits traffic data to the second terminal on a time-frequency resource corresponding to the side-uplink resource.
Considering that the value range of the gap value K SL configured for the first terminal is limited when the base station schedules the side uplink resource, when the base station wants to schedule the SL grant in the active period of the Uu DRX of the first terminal, the scenario shown in fig. 4d may occur, where the base station may schedule the time when the first terminal receives the DCI is located in the active period of the Uu DRX, but any value in the value range based on the gap value K SL cannot enable the SCI sent by the first terminal to fall into the active period of the SL DRX of the second terminal, which results in that the first terminal only locates in the inactive period of the SL DRX according to the gap value K SL indicated by the DCI, that is, the second terminal cannot receive the SCI sent by the first terminal, which results in resource waste or the base station cannot schedule the SL communication resource.
Based on the above problems, the present application provides a communication method, so that Uu DRX of a first terminal and SL DRX of a second terminal can meet scheduling needs of side uplink resources, a base station can schedule the side uplink resources in an active period of Uu DRX of the first terminal, and the first terminal and the second terminal receive and transmit the side uplink resources in the active period of SL DRX by scheduling a gap value, thereby improving scheduling performance of the side uplink resources.
In view of the fact that Uu DRX of the first terminal matches SL DRX of the second terminal, there may be various ways, and in the embodiment of the present application, the way a and the way B are illustrated.
Mode a, the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are determined based on the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
The Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal may be configured for the first terminal by the network device based on the service requirement, and specifically, reference may be made to the description of the Uu DRX parameters configuring the first terminal, which is not described herein.
The Uu DRX parameter of the first terminal may be a Uu DRX parameter of a downlink between the network device configured by the base station for the first terminal and the first terminal, and the configuration may be configured through RRC signaling. For example, the base station configures parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal for the first terminal through an information element (Information Element, DRX-config IE) in the RRCReconfiguration message. The Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal may include Uu DRX parameters in the foregoing description, which are not described herein. Accordingly, the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal may also include the parameters of the SL DRX in the above description, which are not described herein.
The following illustrates a manner of determining parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal in the present application.
As shown in fig. 5a, in some embodiments, the period of SL DRX of the second terminal may be determined according to the period of Uu DRX of the first terminal. For example, the period of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be the same as or a multiple of the period of the Uu DRX of the first terminal to reduce the difficulty of the SL DRX of the second terminal matching the Uu DRX of the first terminal.
Considering the scenario that the period of Uu DRX of the first terminal includes a long period and a short period, the long period length of SL DRX of the second terminal may be the same as or a multiple of the length of the long period of Uu DRX of the first terminal. The short cycle length of SL DRX of the second terminal may be the same as or a multiple of the short cycle length of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
In some embodiments, the length of the inactivity period of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be determined according to the inactivity period of the Uu DRX of the first terminal. For example, the length of the inactivity period of SL DRX of the second terminal may be the same as the length of the inactivity period of Uu DRX of the first terminal. For another example, the length of the inactivity period of SL DRX of the second terminal is longer than the length of the inactivity period of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
In some embodiments, the length of the SL DRX inactivity timer (DRX-INACTIVITYTIMERSL) of SLDRX of the second terminal may be determined according to the length of the uudrx inactivity timer (DRX-inactivity timer) of uudrx of the first terminal. For example, to avoid the second terminal being in a sleep state during a time domain corresponding to the SL communication resource scheduled by the network device, the length of DRX-INACTIVITYTIMERSL of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be the same as the length of DRX-inactivity timer of the first terminal or the length of DRX-INACTIVITYTIMERSL of the SL DRX may be longer than the length of DRX-inactivity timer of the first terminal. For another example, to avoid excessive power consumption of the second terminal caused by the second terminal remaining in an active state when the network does not schedule the SL communication resource, the length of DRX-INACTIVITYTIMERSL of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be shorter than the length of DRX-inactivity timer of the first terminal.
It should be noted that, among the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal, the time-related parameter is represented based on a system frame number, and among the parameters of SLDRX of the second terminal, the time-related parameter is represented based on a direct frame number. Therefore, before determining the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal, the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal indicated by the system frame number may be converted into the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal indicated by the direct frame number. The specific conversion modes are described below and will not be described in detail herein.
Considering the relationship between the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal and the active period of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal, it is related to the time when the first terminal transmits the SCI after receiving the DCI. Therefore, in the present application, the gap set configured by the network device for the first terminal may be used to determine the time interval range between receiving DCI by the first terminal and sending SCI to the second terminal, where the time interval range may be represented by the gap value range satisfied by the gap set. Therefore, in the application, the relation between the parameters of Uu DRX and SL DRX can be determined through at least one value in the gap value range satisfied by the gap set. So that the second terminal receives the SCI sent by the first terminal in the active period of SL DRX (the SCI is sent by the first terminal according to the gap value after receiving the DCI in the active period of Uu DRX).
In some embodiments, as shown in fig. 5b, the active period of the SL DRX cycle may be determined by the active period of Uu DRX and the values within the gap value range that the gap set meets.
Wherein it is considered that the gap set is configured by the network device for the first terminal. For example, the gap set may include 8 gap values K SL, and the gap set may specifically include: 2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16. At this time, according to the maximum value and the minimum value of the gap values in the gap set, the gap value range satisfied by the gap set can be determined to be [2,16]. Thus, in determining the active period of the SL DRX cycle, it may be determined from at least one gap value in the set of gaps. For example, the maximum value of the gap value and/or the minimum value of the gap value in the gap set. The value may be determined by weighting average according to at least one value of the gap set, and the value may be a value in a value range satisfied by the gap set, and the value may be a positive number, not limited to a positive integer. Thus, the active period of the SL DRX cycle can be determined by the active period of Uu DRX and the value.
One possible implementation may determine the first time interval between the starting position of the SL DRX cycle and the starting position of the Uu DRX cycle by a value in the gap value range that the gap set satisfies.
Considering that the value of the gap in the gap set is configured to the first terminal based on the network device for determining the time for the first terminal to transmit the SCI, when determining the starting position of Uu DRX of the first terminal and the starting position of SL DRX of the second terminal, the delay T TA of sending and receiving messages between the network device and the first terminal needs to be considered. Since the delay of the messaging between the network device and the first terminal may vary, the start time of the SL DRX cycle may be determined here based on the maximum delay time T TAmax between the sending and receiving messages between the network device and the first terminal. Therefore, the time interval between the Uu DRX start position of the first terminal and the SL DRX start position of the second terminal may be determined according to the maximum delay time T TAmax and at least one value in the gap value range satisfied by the gap set.
For example, the starting position T SL of the SL DRX cycle satisfies:
TSL=TUu-TTAmax/2+GapSL*Tslot
where T Uu denotes a start position of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal, gap SL denotes a value of a Gap value range satisfied by the Gap set, and T slot denotes a time occupied by one slot (SL slot) of one side uplink. T TAmax/2 represents the maximum delay time between sending and receiving messages due to the Uu interface.
Considering that one value of the Gap value range satisfied by the Gap set may be a decimal, in a specific calculation, the rounded Gap SL may be obtained first to determine the starting position T SL of the SL DRX cycle, or the rounding may be performed after determining the starting position T SL of the SL DRX cycle, which is not limited herein.
Similarly, based on the above-mentioned similar manner, the end position of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be determined according to the end position of the Uu DRX of the first terminal, at least one value in the gap value range satisfied by the gap set, and the maximum delay time T TAmax. The specific embodiments may be referred to the above description, and will not be repeated here.
It should be noted that, since the start position of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal is indicated based on the system frame number, and the start position of the SL DRX cycle is indicated based on the direct frame number, the system frame number and the direct frame number may not be synchronized, and thus, the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN needs to be considered.
The slot offset between the SFN and the DFN may be obtained in a plurality of ways. For example, the first terminal may obtain the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN through the base station broadcasting, the base station reconfiguration, and the UE pre-configuration, so that the second terminal may obtain the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN through the first terminal, and thus, convert, by the second terminal, the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal indicated on the system frame number (that is, the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal configured by the network device for the first terminal) into the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal indicated on the direct frame number. The second terminal may also directly acquire the first terminal to convert the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal, which are set on the system frame number, into parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal, which are indicated on the direct frame number.
For example, with the Uu DRX cycle as a short cycle, the starting position of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal may be determined according to DRX-ShortCycle and DRX-StartOffset, and at this time, the system frame number and the subframe number where the starting position of the Uu DRX cycle is located may be determined through DRX-ShortCycle and DRX-StartOffset. Further, a slot offset where a starting position of a Uu DRX period expressed based on the SFN is located can be determined according to the DRX-slotOffset.
At this time, the direct frame number, the subframe number, and the slot offset where the starting position in the Uu DRX cycle is located may be determined according to the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN (e.g., the DFN is delayed by n slots compared to the SFN), and the system frame number, the subframe number, and the slot offset where the starting position in the Uu DRX cycle is located.
In a specific example, after determining, by the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal, that the starting position of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal indicated by the SFN is sfn=29 and subframe=8, a second slot of which the starting position of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal indicated by the DFN is dfn=30 and subframe=5 may be determined according to the slot offset n=15 between the SFN and the DFN.
In consideration of the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal, there may be other parameters related to the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN, for example, the end position of the active period of the SL DRX, and in this case, before determining the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal based on the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal, it is also necessary to convert the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal indicated by the system frame number into Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal indicated by the direct frame number.
As shown in fig. 5c, in some embodiments, after obtaining the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the DFN representation, the start position of the active period and the end position of the active period of the SL DRX may be determined according to the gap set and the start position of the active period and the end position of the active period of the Uu DRX of the first terminal.
Taking onduration of the SL DRX of the second terminal as an example, the start time of the active period of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal is t1, and the end time of the active period is t2.
One possible way of determining is: the start time t3 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by t1 and the minimum value gap min in the gap set, e.g., t3=t1+gap min. The end time t4 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by t2 and the maximum value gap max in the gap set, e.g., t4=t2+gap max. At this time, the determined activation period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may cover all possible values of the gap value.
Another possible way of determining is: the start time t3 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by the maximum value gap max of the values of t1 and gap, for example, t3=t1+gap max. The end time of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by the minimum value gap min of the values of t2 and gap, t4=t2+gap min. At this time, the determined active period duration of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal is the smallest, which is beneficial to power saving of the second terminal.
Another possible way of determining is: the length (onduration timer) of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal is set to be the same as the length of the active period of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal, i.e. t2-t1=t4-t 3.
Wherein the offset of the start time of the activation period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal from the start time of the activation period of the Uu DRX cycle of the first terminal may be determined according to the gap set.
For example, the start time t3 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by t1 and the minimum value gap min of the gap values. The end time t4 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by t2 and the minimum value gap min of the gap values.
For another example, the start time t3 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by t1 and the maximum value gap max of the gap values. The end time t4 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by the maximum value gap max of the values of t2 and gap.
For another example, the start time t3 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by any value within the gap value range satisfied by t1 and the gap set. The end time t4 of the active period of the SL DRX cycle of the second terminal may be determined by any value within the gap value range satisfied by t2 and the gap set.
In one possible implementation, the active period duration of Uu DRX of the first terminal may also be considered when determining the start position of the active period of SL DRX and the end position of the active period of SL DRX of the second terminal. For example, when the active period duration of Uu DRX of the first terminal is long, it may be considered to set the active period duration of SL DRX to be small. When the active period duration of Uu DRX of the first terminal is short, setting an active period duration of SL DRX equivalent to the active period duration of Uu DRX may be considered.
The determination of the start position of the active period of SL DRX and the end position of the active period of SL DRX of the second terminal by different means is described below with a specific example under different active period durations of Uu DRX.
As shown in fig. 5d, when the duration of the active period of Uu DRX of the first terminal is long, for example, when the duration of the active period of the first DRX is greater than a preset threshold, a possible implementation manner may determine the starting position of the active period of the second DRX based on the direct frame number according to the maximum value of gap and the starting position of the active period of the first DRX based on the direct frame number. The end position of the active period of the second DRX based on the direct frame number may be determined according to the minimum value of the gap and the end position of the active period of the first DRX based on the direct frame number. The preset threshold may be the maximum value of the gap value, or may be the difference between the maximum value of the gap value and the minimum value of the gap value. Of course, it may be determined in other ways, and is not limited herein.
In this way, when the active period duration of Uu DRX of the first terminal is long, the start position of the active period of SL DRX of the second terminal and the end position of the active period of SL DRX of the second terminal can be more reasonably configured.
In another possible implementation manner, when determining that the active period duration of the first DRX is less than or equal to a preset threshold, the first configuration information may include: the maximum value of the gap value or the minimum value of the gap value.
In this way, when the duration of the active period of Uu DRX of the first terminal is shorter, the start position of the active period of SL DRX of the second terminal and the end position of the active period of SL DRX of the second terminal can be more reasonably configured.
Optionally, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal may be further configured in combination with traffic information of the SL connection, parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal, and a gap set. The service information of the SL connection may include service mode (pattern) information of a service to which data transmitted in the SL connection belongs, for example, at least one of service period, time location (offset), quality of service (quality of service, qoS) information, or message size information. In the side uplink, since there are more service pairs and service groups on the side uplink, each service pair or service group has a respective service requirement, based on these service information, more reasonable SLDRX parameters can be determined, for example, the period of SL DRX is consistent with the period of service transmission, and/or by configuring the parameters of SL DRX such that the second communication device is not in a sleep state during a period of time when there is no data transmission (or transmission of control information (such as side link resource scheduling or side link control information (sidelink control information, SCI)) in the SL connection, etc.). When a plurality of SL connections are connected to the second terminal, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal can be determined according to service information of the plurality of SL connections (e.g., all the SL connections) to the second terminal, so that mismatch of service characteristics with other SL connections can be avoided, and service transmission quality can be improved.
Mode B, the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal are determined based on the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal.
The parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be configured based on the traffic needs between the first terminal and the second terminal.
For example, parameters of SLDRX of the second terminal may be configured based on traffic information of the SL connection. The specific manner of configuring the service information based on the SL connection may refer to the description of the service information of the SL connection in the above-described manner a, except that in this manner, the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal and the gap set are not considered to determine the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal.
In addition, the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal may also be determined based on transmission resources corresponding to the SL connection between the first terminal and the second terminal. Therefore, according to the transmission resources corresponding to the SL connection between the first terminal and the second terminal, the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal are determined, so that the second terminal can avoid being in a sleep state except for the possible transmission time of the data or control information of the SL connection, and the energy saving effect is improved. When a plurality of SL connections of the second terminal are connected, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal can be determined according to transmission resources corresponding to the plurality of SL connections (e.g., all of the SL connections) of the second terminal, and mismatch of transmission resources with other SL connections can be avoided, thereby improving service transmission quality.
As shown in fig. 5e, after determining the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal, the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal may be determined based on the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal.
In view of the fact that the time-related parameter is represented by a system frame number among the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal and the time-related parameter is represented by a direct frame number among the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal, in a similar manner a, the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal represented by the direct frame number may also be converted into the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal represented by the system frame number before determining the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal based on the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal.
For example, the starting position of the SL DRX of the second terminal indicated based on the direct frame number is a direct frame number, a subframe number, and a slot offset where the starting position of the SL DRX is determined based on DRX-StartOffsetSL and DRX-slotoffsetSL. Therefore, the system frame number, the subframe number and the time slot offset where the starting position of the SL DRX is located can be determined through the time slot offset between the SFN and the DFN.
In a specific example, according to DRX-StartOffsetSL and DRX-slotoffsetSL of the second terminal, it may be determined that the starting position of the SL DRX of the second terminal is dfn=30, subframe=5 is the 2 nd slot, the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN is n=15 (DFN lags by 15 slots relative to the SFN), and the starting position of the SL DRX of the second terminal indicated based on the SFN is sfn=29, subframe=8 is the 1 st slot.
In one possible implementation manner, after determining the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal indicated by the system frame number, the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal indicated by the system frame number may be determined based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal indicated by the system frame number and the gap set.
For example, the start position of the active period of Uu DRX may be determined according to the minimum value of the gap value and the start position of the active period of SL DRX. The length of the active period of Uu DRX (e.g., DRX-onduration timer) may be determined according to the length of the active period of SL DRX.
Optionally, the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal may also be determined in combination with the transmission resources and traffic requirements between the first terminal and the network device and in combination with the parameters of SL DRX and the gap set of the second terminal.
In a specific embodiment, the determination manner of the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be determined based on the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal in the above manner a, which is not described herein.
Based on the manner of determining the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal and the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal in the manner a and the manner B described above, in the embodiment of the present application, the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be configured by the network device, the first terminal, or the second terminal. The following illustrates possible flows of embodiments a and B with parameters of SL DRX in which the network device, the first terminal or the second terminal configures the second terminal, respectively.
Example 1.1 (scenario 1-1 a)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one possible scenario 1-1a of mode a is illustrated by the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal being configured by the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 6a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S601a: the network device establishes a communication connection with the first terminal.
In the application, a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection is established between the network device and the first terminal, and for the scene of multicast or broadcast, the communication method provided by the application can be applied when the RRC connection is established between the network device and the first terminal. The RRC connection may be a unicast RRC connection or a multicast RRC connection. If no RRC connection is established, a parameter of the first DRX (parameter of Uu DRX) may be carried between the network device and the first terminal through a Control Element (CE) message or signaling/information such as DCI, PDCCH, or other information needed to implement the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
After the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal, the network device may configure parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal for the first terminal. The parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal may be determined by the network device based on the service requirement and transmission resources between the network device and the first terminal, and a specific manner may be referred to as mode a.
S602a: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
S603a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
In the present application, a SL connection, for example, a SL PC5-S connection, or a SL RRC connection, may be required to be established between the first terminal and the second terminal, so for a multicast or broadcast scenario, the communication method provided by the present application may be applied only when a SL RRC connection is established between the first terminal and the second terminal. The SL RRC connection here may be a unicast SL RRC connection or a multicast SL RRC connection. If no RRC connection is established, a Control Element (CE) message or signaling/information such as SCI, PSCCH, etc. may be used to carry SL DRX configuration or other information needed to implement the method provided by the embodiments of the present application between the first terminal and the second terminal.
S604a: the first terminal obtains first configuration information.
Wherein the first configuration information may be used to instruct the second terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal (parameters of SL DRX) based on the first configuration information.
In one possible implementation, the first configuration information may include: parameters of the first DRX and a first time interval. Wherein the first time interval may be at least one of a range of time intervals between receiving DCI by the first terminal and transmitting SCI to the second terminal. I.e. the first time interval may be at least one value in the range of gap values that the set of gaps satisfy. For example, the time interval may include at least one of: the maximum value of the gap value in the gap set and the minimum value of the gap value in the gap set.
In some embodiments, it is considered that the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network device and is based on the parameter of the first DRX indicated by the system frame number, and the parameter of the second DRX determined by the second terminal is based on the direct frame number, so the first terminal may convert the parameter of the first DRX indicated by the system frame number into the parameter of the first DRX indicated by the direct frame number. At this time, the first configuration information may include a parameter of the first DRX indicated based on the direct frame number. In another possible implementation manner, the first configuration information may include: based on the parameter of the first DRX represented by the system frame number, and the time slot offset between the system frame number and the direct frame number. Therefore, after receiving the first configuration information, the second terminal can determine the parameter based on the first DRX indicated by the direct frame number according to the parameter based on the first DRX indicated by the system frame number and the time slot offset between the system frame number and the direct frame number. After the second terminal receives the first configuration information, the second terminal may determine, according to the time interval and the parameter based on the first DRX indicated by the direct frame number, the parameter based on the second DRX indicated by the direct frame number.
In some embodiments, if the time interval in the first configuration information is the maximum value gap max of the gap values, the second terminal may obtain the starting position of the second DRX according to the starting position of the first DRX, gap max, and T TAmax, which are indicated by the direct frame number. The second terminal may shift the gap max backward according to the end position of the active period of the first DRX indicated based on the direct frame number, to obtain the end position of the active period of the second DRX. The time interval in the first configuration information may also be other values within the gap value range that the gap set meets, and specifically, the method for determining the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal in the above manner a may be referred to, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the first configuration information may further include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Thus, the second terminal may also determine the parameters of the second DRX based on the parameters of the first DRX and the time interval in combination with QoS information of the SL service.
Optionally, the first configuration information may further include: preference information of parameters of the second DRX.
The preference information of the parameters of the second DRX may be determined by the first terminal or the second terminal based on factors such as service requirements or self capabilities. The preference information of the parameters of the second DRX may indicate setting conditions of all or part of the parameters of the second DRX. For example, preference information of the parameters of the second DRX may include: the period of the second DRX is greater than the first threshold, or preference information of the parameter of the second DRX may include: the active period duration of the second DRX is less than a second threshold. Thus, the parameters of the second DRX configured by the second terminal are more prone to a power saving strategy.
Under the scenario 1-1a, the first terminal may determine, according to a predetermined manner or a current service requirement, that the current scenario is a scenario in which the second terminal configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of second DRX) based on parameters of first DRX of the first terminal. The predetermined manner referred to in the present application may refer to a manner specified by a protocol, or may be determined after the first terminal, the second terminal, and the network device negotiate with each other in a communication process. At this time, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information accordingly.
In some embodiments, the first terminal may determine that the matching of the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal to the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal is easier to achieve. For example, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information when the first terminal determines that the traffic between the first terminal and the network device is smaller and the traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal is larger. Therefore, the first terminal can send the first configuration information to the second terminal, so that the second terminal can determine the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal through the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the first configuration information, the respective service needs can be better adapted, and the resource utilization rate is improved.
Therefore, after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection, the first terminal may correspondingly generate the first configuration information based on the mode a.
S605a: the first terminal sends first configuration information to the second terminal.
For example, the first configuration information may be sent by the first terminal to the second terminal through RRCReconfigurationSidelink messages.
It should be noted that, the first configuration information may be sent by the network device to the first terminal through RRCReconfiguration messages. The first configuration information may be located in a new IE in the message, not limited herein.
S606a: and the second terminal determines parameters of a second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The manner of determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may refer to S604a and manner a. The determination of the start position of the active period of the second DRX and the end position of the active period of the second DRX are illustrated below at different time intervals included in the first configuration information.
In one possible implementation manner, when determining that the activation period of the first DRX is greater than a preset threshold, the first configuration information may include: the maximum value of the gap value and the minimum value of the gap value.
The preset threshold may be the maximum value of the gap value, or may be the difference between the maximum value of the gap value and the minimum value of the gap value. Of course, it may be determined in other ways, and is not limited herein.
Correspondingly, after determining that the received first configuration information includes the maximum value of the gap value and the minimum value of the gap value, the second terminal may determine, according to the maximum value of the gap in the first configuration information and the start position of the activation period of the first DRX based on the direct frame number, the start position of the activation period of the second DRX based on the direct frame number. The second terminal may determine an end position of the active period of the second DRX indicated by the direct frame number based on the minimum value of the gap in the first configuration information and the end position of the active period of the first DRX indicated by the direct frame number.
In another possible implementation manner, when determining that the active period duration of the first DRX is less than or equal to a preset threshold, the first configuration information may include: the maximum value of the gap value or the minimum value of the gap value.
At this time, taking the example that the first configuration information includes the maximum value of the gap value as the example, the second terminal may determine the start position of the active period of the second DRX based on the direct frame number according to the maximum value of the gap and the start position of the active period of the first DRX based on the direct frame number after receiving the first configuration information. The second terminal may determine an end position of the active period of the second DRX based on the direct frame number based on the maximum value of the gap and the end position of the active period of the first DRX based on the direct frame number.
S607a: the second terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
S608a: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
By the method, after the first terminal and the second terminal are connected, the second terminal configures SLDRX parameters of the second terminal based on Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal, so that the second terminal can receive SCI sent by the first terminal in the activated period of Uu DRX in the activated period of SL DRX, and when SL DRX and Uu DRX are used simultaneously, scheduling of side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal by network equipment is facilitated, and resource scheduling performance and resource utilization rate are improved.
Example 1.2 (scenario 1-1 b)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one possible scenario 1-1b of mode a is illustrated by the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal being configured by the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 6b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s601b: the network device establishes a communication connection with the first terminal.
Details refer to 601a.
S602b: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
The first terminal receives the first DRX parameter sent by the network device, where the first DRX parameter is based on the first DRX parameter indicated by the system frame number. In addition, S602b may be an optional step, where when the network device needs to send the first configuration information 1 to the first terminal, the parameter of the first DRX may be sent together with the first configuration information 1, or may be sent separately, which is not limited herein. The specific first configuration information 1 is introduced in the following steps.
S603b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
The details refer to S603a.
S604b: the second terminal sends the first configuration information 2 to the first terminal.
The second terminal determines, based on a pre-agreed manner or its own needs, that the method in this example is implemented using manner a, at which time the second terminal may send first configuration information 2 to the first terminal, where the first configuration request 2 is used to request the first terminal to obtain the first configuration information. Alternatively, the first configuration information 2 may further indicate that the first configuration information 2 is used by the second terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information. Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information according to the first configuration information 2.
Optionally, the first configuration information 2 may further include: preference information of parameters of the second DRX determined by the first terminal or the second terminal. Thus, the first terminal may preferentially configure the first configuration information that approximates or satisfies the preference information of the parameter of the second DRX based on the preference information of the parameter of the second DRX.
S605b: the first terminal obtains first configuration information.
Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information according to the first configuration information 2. The method of generating the first configuration information may be referred to as S604a in example 1.1.
Optionally, the first terminal sends a first configuration request 1 to the network device through the first configuration information 2, where the first configuration request 1 is used to request the network device to configure the first configuration information 1 for the first terminal. Optionally, the first configuration request 1 may further indicate that the first configuration information 1 is used by the second terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information.
Alternatively, the first configuration request 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Thus, the network device may also determine the first configuration information 1 in combination with QoS information of the SL traffic. Optionally, the first configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the second DRX determined by the network device. Thus, the network device can configure the first configuration information 1 of the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX based on the QoS information of the SL service. Thus, the network device may generate the first configuration information 1 from the received first configuration request 1. Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information according to the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2.
Note that, the first configuration information 2 may be the same as or different from the content carried in the first configuration information 1, and is not limited herein. The first configuration information 2 may be transmitted to the first terminal by the second terminal through RRCReconfigurationSidelink message. The first configuration information 2 may be located in a new IE in the message, not limited herein.
The first configuration request 1 may be sent by the first terminal to the network device through an existing or new RRC message. For example, the first configuration request 1 may be sent by the first terminal to the network device through a first IE in UEAssistanceInformation message, sidelinkUEInformationNR message, or UEInformationResponse message. The first configuration request 1 may be located in a new IE, and the IEs in UEAssistanceInformation may be multiplexed, for example, the first configuration request 1 is UEAssistanceInformation message DRX-PREFERENCE IE, or the first configuration request 1 may be located in other IEs, which are not limited herein. The first configuration request 1 may also be transmitted through a MAC CE or UCI indicating a corresponding function or information, etc., without limitation.
The first configuration information 1 may be sent by the network device to the first terminal through RRCReconfiguration messages. The first configuration information 1 may be located in a new IE in the message, which is not limited herein.
S606b: the first terminal sends first configuration information to the second terminal.
For example, the first configuration information may be sent by the first terminal to the second terminal through RRCReconfigurationSidelink messages.
S607b: and the second terminal determines parameters of a second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The manner of determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may refer to S606a and manner a.
S608b: the second terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
S609b: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
Example 1.3 (scenario 1-1 c)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one possible scenario 1-1c of mode a is illustrated by the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal being configured by the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 6c, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s601c: the network device establishes a communication connection with the first terminal.
Details refer to 601a.
S602c: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
S602c may be an optional step, where when the network device needs to send the first configuration information 1 to the first terminal, the parameter of the first DRX may be sent together with the first configuration information 1, or may be sent separately, which is not limited herein. The specific first configuration information 1 is introduced in the following steps.
S603 c: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
Details are referenced 603a.
S604 c: the network device sends the first configuration information 1 to the first terminal.
The network device may determine, based on a predetermined manner or its own needs, that the method in the present application is implemented using manner a, and generate the first configuration information 1 accordingly. Optionally, the first configuration information 1 may further instruct the second terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal. Further, the network device may send the first configuration information 1 to the second terminal through the first terminal.
The first configuration information 1 may be used for the first terminal to obtain the first configuration information. That is, the first configuration information 1 may be part or all of the content of the first configuration information, which is not limited herein. The content in the first configuration information 1 may be determined according to specific needs. For example, when the first configuration information 1 is transmitted separately from the parameters of the first DRX, the parameters of the first DRX may not be carried in the first configuration information 1 compared to the first configuration information obtained by the first terminal. Other parameters may also be carried in the first configuration information 1, and specific reference may be made to the content in the first configuration information. For another example, the first configuration information 1 may be used only to instruct the second terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal. Of course, the first configuration information 1 may be the same as the content indicated in the first configuration information, which is not described herein. Specific content may refer to S605b, and will not be described herein.
S605c: the first terminal obtains first configuration information.
Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information according to the first configuration information 1. The method of generating the first configuration information may be referred to as S604a in example 1.1.
Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information according to the first configuration information 1.
S606 c: the first terminal sends first configuration information to the second terminal.
For example, the first configuration information may be sent by the first terminal to the second terminal through RRCReconfigurationSidelink messages.
S607 c: and the second terminal determines parameters of a second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The manner of determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may refer to S606a and manner a.
S608 c: the second terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
S609 c: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
After the first terminal and the second terminal are connected, the second terminal configures the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the activated period of the Uu DRX in the activated period of the SL DRX, and when the SL DRX and the Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment on the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of resource scheduling are improved.
Example 2.1 (scenario 1-2 a)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one possible scenario 1-2a of mode a is illustrated by the parameters of SL DRX where the first terminal configures the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 7a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s701a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S702a: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
For a specific manner, see S602a.
S703a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S704a: the first terminal obtains first configuration information.
The first terminal may determine, according to a predetermined manner or a current service requirement, that the current scenario is a scenario in which the first terminal configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of second DRX) based on parameters of first DRX of the first terminal. Therefore, after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection, the first terminal may correspondingly generate the first configuration information based on the mode a.
Wherein the first configuration information may be used to instruct the first terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal (parameters of SL DRX) based on the first configuration information.
In one possible implementation, the first configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the first DRX. Wherein the time interval is used to represent at least one value in the gap value range that the gap set satisfies.
In some embodiments, it is considered that the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX transmitted by the network device is based on the parameter of the first DRX indicated by the system frame number, and the parameter of the second DRX is indicated by the direct frame number, and thus the first terminal may convert the parameter of the first DRX indicated by the system frame number into the parameter of the first DRX indicated by the direct frame number.
In some embodiments, if the time interval in the first configuration information is the maximum value gap max of the gap values, the first terminal may obtain the starting position of the second DRX according to the starting position of the first DRX, gap max, and T TAmax, which are indicated by the direct frame number. The first terminal may shift the gap max backward according to the end position of the active period of the first DRX indicated based on the direct frame number, to obtain the end position of the active period of the second DRX. The time interval in the first configuration information may also be other values in the gap value range that the gap set satisfies, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the first configuration information may further include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the first configuration information may further include: preference information of parameters of the second DRX. The content of the specific first configuration information may be referred to S604a.
Alternatively, the first terminal may send a first configuration request 1 to the network device for obtaining the first configuration information 1. Alternatively, the first terminal may send a first configuration request 2 to the second terminal for obtaining the first configuration information 2.
The first configuration information 2 may be the same as or different from the content carried in the first configuration information 1, and is not limited herein. The content of the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2 may refer to the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2 in the foregoing, and will not be described herein.
S705a: and the first terminal determines parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The manner of determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may be referred to as a manner a.
S706a: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the second terminal.
S707a: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
Example 2.2 (scenario 1-2 b)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one possible scenario 1-2b of mode a is illustrated by the parameters of SL DRX where the first terminal configures the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 7b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S701b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S702b: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
The first terminal receives the first DRX parameter sent by the network device, where the first DRX parameter is based on the first DRX parameter indicated by the system frame number. For a specific manner, see S602a.
S703b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603b.
S704b: the second terminal sends the first configuration information 2 to the first terminal.
The second terminal determines, based on a pre-agreed manner or its own needs, that the method in this example is implemented using manner a, at which time the second terminal may send first configuration information 2 to the first terminal, where the first configuration information 2 is used to request the first terminal to obtain the first configuration information. Alternatively, the first configuration information 2 may further indicate that the first configuration information is used by the first terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information.
S705b: the first terminal obtains the first configuration information based on the first configuration information 2.
In some embodiments, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information based on the first configuration information 2. The content of the specific first configuration information may be referred to S704a.
In other embodiments, after the second terminal may further send the first configuration information 2 to the first terminal, the first terminal sends a first configuration request 1 to the network device, where the first configuration request 1 is used to request the network device to configure the first configuration information 1 for the first terminal. Optionally, the first configuration request 1 may further indicate that the first configuration information 1 is used by the first terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information.
Alternatively, the first configuration information 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Thus, the network device may also determine the first configuration information 1 in combination with QoS information of the SL traffic. Optionally, the first configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the second DRX determined by the first terminal or the second terminal. Thus, the network device may preferentially configure the first configuration information 1 that approximates or satisfies the preference information of the parameter of the second DRX based on the preference information of the parameter of the second DRX. Thus, the network device may generate the first configuration information 1 from the received first configuration information 1.
Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the first configuration information based on the first configuration information 1.
The first configuration information 2 may be the same as or different from the content carried in the first configuration information 1, and is not limited herein. The content of the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2 may refer to the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2 in the scene 1-1b specifically, which are not described herein again.
S706b: and the first terminal determines parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The manner of determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may be referred to as a manner a.
S707b: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the second terminal.
S708b: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
Example 2.3 (scenario 1-2 c)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one possible scenario 1-2c of mode a is illustrated by the parameters of SL DRX where the first terminal configures the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 7c, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S701c: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S702c: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
The first terminal receives the first DRX parameter sent by the network device, where the first DRX parameter is based on the first DRX parameter indicated by the system frame number. For a specific manner, see S602a.
S703c: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603b.
S704c: the network device sends the first configuration information 1 to the first terminal.
The network device may determine the method of implementing this example using mode a based on a pre-agreed mode or its own needs and generate the first configuration information 1 accordingly. Optionally, the first configuration information 1 may further instruct the first terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal.
Further, the network device may send the first configuration information 1 to the first terminal. The first configuration information 1 may be used for the first terminal to obtain the first configuration information. That is, the first configuration information 1 may be part or all of the content of the first configuration information, which is not limited herein. The content in the first configuration information 1 may be determined according to specific needs, and reference may be made to the embodiment in S604c, which is not described herein.
S705c: the first terminal obtains the first configuration information according to the first configuration information 1.
Optionally, the first terminal may further determine, according to the first configuration information 1, that the first configuration request 2 needs to be sent to the second terminal, so as to obtain the first configuration information 2. Therefore, the first terminal may also send the first configuration request 2 to the second terminal, and the corresponding second terminal sends the first configuration information 2 to the first terminal. The content of the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2 may refer to the first configuration information 1 and the first configuration information 2 in the scene 1-1c specifically, which are not described herein again.
S706c: and the first terminal determines parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The manner of determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may be referred to as a manner a.
S707c: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the second terminal.
S708c: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
After the first terminal and the second terminal are connected, the first terminal configures the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the activated period of the Uu DRX in the activated period of the SL DRX, and when the SL DRX and the Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment on the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of resource scheduling are improved.
Example 3.1 (scenario 1-3 a)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX configuring the second terminal by the network device exemplify one possible scenario 1-3a of mode a. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 8a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s801a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S802a: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
In addition, S802a may be an optional step, for example, the parameter of the first DRX may be transmitted together with the parameter of the second DRX, or may be transmitted separately, which is not limited herein.
S803a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
S804a: the first terminal sends first configuration information 1 to the network device.
The first terminal determines that the method in this example is implemented by using the method a according to a predetermined manner or based on own needs, so as to correspondingly generate the first configuration information 1, which is used to request the network device to obtain the first configuration information. Optionally, the first configuration information 1 may further request the network device to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information.
Alternatively, the first configuration information 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Thus, the network device may also determine parameters of the second DRX based on the parameters of the first DRX and the time interval in combination with QoS information of the SL traffic.
Optionally, the first configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the second DRX determined by the first terminal or the second terminal. The manner of preference information of the parameters of the second DRX in S604a may be specifically referred to. Thus, the network device may preferentially configure the parameters of the second DRX that are close to or meet the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX based on the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX.
For example, at this time, the first configuration information 1 may be transmitted through an RRC message. The first configuration information 1 may be transmitted to the network device by the first terminal through an existing or new RRC message. For example, the first configuration information 1 may be sent by the first terminal to the network device through a first IE in UEAssistanceInformation message, sidelinkUEInformationNR message, or UEInformationResponse message. The first configuration information 1 may be located in a new IE, or the IEs in UEAssistanceInformation may be multiplexed, for example, the first configuration information 1 is UEAssistanceInformation message DRX-PREFERENCE IE, or the first configuration information 1 may be located in other IEs, which are not limited herein. The first configuration information 1 may also be transmitted through a MAC CE or UCI indicating a corresponding function or information, etc., without limitation.
S805a: the network device obtains first configuration information.
Accordingly, the network device may generate the first configuration information according to the first configuration information 1.
Wherein the first configuration information may be used to instruct the network device to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal (parameters of SL DRX) based on the first configuration information. In one possible implementation, the first configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the first DRX. Thus, the network device may determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information. Optionally, the first configuration information may further include: the QoS information of the SL service enables the network equipment to determine the parameters of SLDRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information, so that the service requirements of the second terminal can be better adapted, and the resource utilization rate is improved. The content included in the specific first configuration information may refer to the content of the first configuration information described above, which is not described herein.
S806a: and the network equipment determines parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The method for determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may refer to S606a and the method a, which are not described herein.
S807a: the network device sends parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
S808a: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the second terminal.
Example 3.2 (scenario 1-3 b)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX configuring the second terminal by the network device exemplify one possible scenario 1-3b of mode a. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 8b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S801b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S802b: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
In addition, S802b may be an optional step, for example, the parameter of the first DRX may be transmitted together with the parameter of the second DRX, or may be transmitted separately, which is not limited herein.
S803b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
S804b: the second terminal sends the first configuration information 2 to the first terminal.
The second terminal determines, according to a predetermined manner or based on own needs, that the method in this example is implemented using the manner a, thereby generating the first configuration information 2 accordingly, for requesting the network device to obtain the first configuration information. Optionally, the first configuration information 2 may further request the network device to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information.
It should be noted that, to save signaling, the first configuration information 2 may not include QoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal.
Alternatively, the first configuration information 1 or the first configuration information 2 may include: preference information of the parameters of the second DRX determined by the second terminal. The manner of preference information of the parameters of the second DRX in S604a may be specifically referred to. Thus, the network device may preferentially configure the parameters of the second DRX that are close to or meet the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX based on the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX.
S805b: the first terminal sends first configuration information 1 to the network device.
The first terminal generates first configuration information 1 according to the first configuration information 2, and sends the first configuration information 1 to the network device.
Alternatively, the first configuration information 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Thus, the network device may also determine parameters of the second DRX based on the parameters of the first DRX and the time interval in combination with QoS information of the SL traffic.
Optionally, the first configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the second DRX determined by the first terminal or the second terminal. The manner of preference information of the parameters of the second DRX in S604a may be specifically referred to.
For example, the preference information of the second DRX parameter determined by the second terminal is included in the first configuration information 2, and the first terminal may carry the preference information of the second DRX parameter in the first configuration information 2 in the first configuration information 1. Or the first terminal may also be preference information of the parameters of the second DRX in the determined first configuration information 1 (the preference information may be determined after integrating the parameters of the DRX corresponding to the plurality of second terminals) based on preference information of the parameters of the second DRX of the first configuration information 2 and its own traffic needs (for example, a side uplink is established between the first terminal and the plurality of second terminals, and parameters of DRX corresponding to the plurality of second terminals need to be considered). Thus, the network device may also determine the parameters of the second DRX based on the parameters of the first DRX and the time interval in combination with preference information of the parameters of the second DRX in the first configuration information 1.
Thus, the network device may preferentially configure the parameters of the second DRX that are close to or meet the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX based on the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX.
For example, the first configuration information 1 may be transmitted through an RRC message. The specific transmission method is referred to S804a.
S806b: the network device obtains first configuration information.
Accordingly, the network device may generate the first configuration information according to the first configuration information 1.
Wherein the first configuration information may be used to instruct the network device to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal (parameters of SL DRX) based on the first configuration information. In one possible implementation, the first configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the first DRX. Thus, the network device may determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information. The content included in the specific first configuration information may refer to the above, and will not be described herein. Optionally, the first configuration information may further include: the QoS information of the SL service enables the network equipment to determine the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information, thereby being capable of better adapting to respective service requirements and improving the resource utilization rate.
S807b: and the network equipment determines parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The method for determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may refer to S606a and the method a, which are not described herein.
S808b: the network device sends parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
S809b: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the second terminal.
Example 3.3 (scenario 1-3 c)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX configuring the second terminal by the network device exemplify one possible scenario 1-3c of mode a. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 8c, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S801c: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S802c: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
In addition, S602c may be an optional step, for example, the parameter of the first DRX may be transmitted together with the parameter of the second DRX, or may be transmitted separately, which is not limited herein.
S803c: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
S804c: the network device obtains first configuration information.
The network device may determine that the current scenario is a scenario in which the network device configures parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal (parameters of second DRX) based on parameters of first DRX of the first terminal according to a pre-agreed manner or based on a requirement of the current service. Thus, the network device may determine that the method in this example is implemented using mode a after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection, and generate the first configuration information accordingly.
Wherein the first configuration information may be used to instruct the network device to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal (parameters of SLDRX) based on the first configuration information. In one possible implementation, the first configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the first DRX. Thus, the network device may determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information. The content included in the specific first configuration information may refer to the above, and will not be described herein. Optionally, the first configuration information may further include: the QoS information of the SL service enables the network equipment to determine the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information, thereby being capable of better adapting to respective service requirements and improving the resource utilization rate. The specific content of the first configuration information may refer to scenario 1-1a, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the network device may further request, from the first terminal or the second terminal, preference information for obtaining parameters of the second DRX determined by the first terminal or the second terminal. The manner of preference information of the parameters of the second DRX in S604a may be specifically referred to. Thus, the network device may preferentially configure the parameters of the second DRX that are close to or meet the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX based on the preference information of the parameters of the second DRX.
S805c: and the network equipment determines parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The method for determining the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information may refer to S606a and the method a, which are not described herein.
S806c: the network device sends parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
S807c: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the second terminal.
By the method, after the first terminal and the second terminal are connected, the network equipment configures SLDRX parameters of the second terminal based on Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal, so that the second terminal can receive SCI sent by the first terminal in the activated period of Uu DRX in the activated period of SL DRX, and when SL DRX and Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network equipment on side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of resource scheduling are improved.
Example 4.1 (scenario 2-1 a)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the second terminal to exemplify one scenario 2-1a of mode B. In this scenario, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the second terminal, and parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 9a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S901a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
Alternatively, the network device may send the parameter of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal after the first terminal establishes a connection with the network device. At this time, the parameter of the first DRX transmitted by the network device may be a parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal configured based on the mode a, i.e., a parameter of Uu DRX that is not determined or adjusted according to the parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal. Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the parameter of the first DRX sent by the network equipment.
S902a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
The details refer to S603a.
S903a: the first terminal sends the third configuration information 2 to the second terminal.
The first terminal determines parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal in the current scene according to a pre-agreed mode or based on the requirement of the current service, and determines parameters of Uu DRX (parameters of third DRX) of the first terminal based on the parameters of fourth DRX through the network equipment.
Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the third configuration information 2 accordingly.
For example, after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection, the first terminal may send third configuration information 2 to the second terminal, for indicating the second terminal to configure parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal. For example, the third configuration information 2 includes: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 2 may be further used to instruct the third configuration information 2 to be used by the second terminal to determine parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal based on the third configuration information 2.
In other embodiments, the first terminal may also send a third configuration request 1 to the network device, where the third configuration request 1 is used to obtain third configuration information 1 configured by the network device for the first terminal. For example, the third configuration information 1 includes: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Thus, the first terminal generates the third configuration information 2 after obtaining the third configuration information 1.
Wherein the third configuration information 2 may be used for the second terminal to obtain the third configuration information. That is, the third configuration information 2 may be part or all of the content of the third configuration information, which is not limited herein. The content in the third configuration information 2 may be determined according to specific needs. For example, when the third configuration information 2 is transmitted separately from QoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal may not be carried in the third configuration information 2 as compared with the third configuration information obtained by the second terminal.
For example, the third configuration information 2 may be transmitted to the second terminal by the first terminal through an RRC message. The transmission manner of the third configuration information 2 may refer to the transmission manner of the first configuration information 2, which is not described herein.
S904a: the second terminal obtains third configuration information according to the third configuration information 2.
Wherein the third configuration information may be used to instruct the second terminal to determine parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Optionally, the third configuration information may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal.
Optionally, the third configuration information may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the fourth DRX, which is not described herein.
S905a: and the second terminal determines parameters of the fourth DRX according to the third configuration information.
The parameter of the fourth DRX is determined based on the manner in which the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal is determined in the manner B. In a possible implementation manner, when the third configuration information includes QoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, the second terminal may determine the parameter of the fourth DRX through the QoS information of the SL traffic. But may be determined by other means and is not limited herein.
S906a: the second terminal transmits parameters of the fourth DRX to the first terminal.
S907a: the first terminal sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device.
The first terminal determines parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal in the current scene according to a pre-agreed mode or based on the requirement of the current service, and determines parameters of Uu DRX (parameters of third DRX) of the first terminal based on the parameters of fourth DRX through the network equipment. Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the second configuration information 1 accordingly.
Optionally, the second configuration information 1 may further include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX.
Optionally, the first terminal may also send parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device. The second configuration information 1 may be transmitted separately from the fourth DRX parameter, or may be transmitted together, which is not limited herein.
For example, the second configuration information 1 may be transmitted to the network device by the first terminal through an RRC message. The transmission manner of the second configuration information 1 may refer to the transmission manner of the first configuration request 1, which is not described herein.
S908a: the network device obtains the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1.
The network device may generate the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1 and other information stored in the network device.
In one possible implementation, the second configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal.
Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: one or more of parameters of the first DRX, qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of parameters of the third DRX, and the like.
Specifically, the network device may obtain the second configuration information by combining the obtained parameter and time interval of the fourth DRX with one or more of the parameter of the first DRX, qoS information of the SL service between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of the parameter of the third DRX, and so on.
S909a: and the network equipment determines the parameters of the third DRX according to the second configuration information.
The method for determining the parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information may refer to the method for determining the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in the method B, which is not described herein. In another possible implementation manner, considering that after S901a, the network device may configure the first terminal with the parameter of the first DRX, at this time, the parameter of the third DRX may be determined after the parameter of the first DRX is reconfigured based on the parameter of the first DRX and the parameter of the fourth DRX.
S9010a: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
Example 4.2 (scenario 2-1 b)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one scenario 2-1B of mode B is illustrated by the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal being configured by the second terminal. In this scenario, parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the second terminal, and parameters of UuDRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 9b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s901b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
The specific manner can be seen in S901a.
S902b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific way, see S902a.
S903b: the second terminal obtains third configuration information.
Wherein the third configuration information may be used to instruct the second terminal to determine parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal.
In some embodiments, the second terminal may obtain the third configuration information according to information stored in the second terminal.
Optionally, the third configuration information may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal.
Optionally, the third configuration information may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the fourth DRX, which is not described herein.
In some embodiments, the second terminal may further send a third configuration request 2 to the first terminal, where the third configuration request 2 is used to obtain third configuration information 2 configured by the first terminal for the second terminal. For example, the third configuration information 2 includes: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 2 may further include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. Thus, the second terminal obtains the third configuration information after obtaining the third configuration information 2.
In other embodiments, the first terminal may further send a third configuration request 1 to the network device according to the third configuration request 2, where the third configuration request 1 is used to obtain third configuration information 1 configured by the network device for the second terminal. For example, the third configuration information 1 includes: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. Thus, the first terminal generates the third configuration information 2 according to the third configuration information 1, so that the second terminal obtains the third configuration information after obtaining the third configuration information 2.
S904b: and the second terminal determines parameters of the fourth DRX according to the third configuration information.
For a specific determination manner, reference may be made to S905a.
S905b: the second terminal sends the second configuration information 2 to the first terminal.
Optionally, the second configuration information 2 may include: parameters of the fourth DRX.
Optionally, the second terminal sends parameters of the fourth DRX to the first terminal. The second configuration information 2 may be transmitted separately from the fourth DRX parameter, or may be transmitted together, which is not limited herein.
The second terminal determines parameters of the Uu DRX (parameters of the third DRX) of the first terminal based on the parameters of the fourth DRX by the network device after determining that the current scenario configures parameters of the SL DRX (parameters of the fourth DRX) for the second terminal, and at this time, the second terminal may also send second configuration information 2 to the first terminal. Wherein the second configuration information 2 may be used to instruct the network device to determine parameters of the third DRX of the first terminal based on the second configuration information.
Optionally, the second configuration information 2 may include: the setting manner of the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may specifically refer to the setting manner of the preference information of the parameter of the first DRX. Thus, the network device may preferentially configure the parameters of the third DRX that are close to or meet the preference information of the parameters of the third DRX based on the preference information of the parameters of the third DRX.
For example, the second configuration information 2 may be transmitted to the first terminal through an RRC message by the second terminal. The second configuration information 2 may be located in a new IE in the message, not limited herein.
S906b: the first terminal sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device.
Wherein the second configuration information 1 is used to instruct the network device to determine a Uu DRX parameter of the first terminal (a parameter of the third DRX) based on the second configuration information.
For example, the second configuration information 1 may include: parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information 1 may further include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX.
For example, the second configuration information 1 may be transmitted to the network device by the first terminal through an RRC message. The transmission manner of the second configuration information 1 may refer to the transmission manner of the first configuration information 1, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the first terminal may also send parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device. The second configuration information 1 may be transmitted separately from the fourth DRX parameter, or may be transmitted together, which is not limited herein.
S907b: the network device obtains the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1.
The network device may generate the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1 and other information stored in the network device.
In one possible implementation, the second configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal.
Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: one or more of parameters of the first DRX, qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of parameters of the third DRX, and the like.
Specifically, the network device may obtain the second configuration information by combining the obtained parameter and time interval of the fourth DRX with one or more of the parameter of the first DRX, qoS information of the SL service between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of the parameter of the third DRX, and so on.
S908b: and the network equipment determines the parameters of the third DRX according to the second configuration information.
The method for determining the parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information may refer to the method for determining the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in the method B, which is not described herein. In another possible implementation manner, considering that after S901a, the network device may configure the first terminal with the parameter of the first DRX, at this time, the parameter of the third DRX may be determined after the parameter of the first DRX is reconfigured based on the parameter of the first DRX and the parameter of the fourth DRX.
S909b: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
Example 4.3 (scenario 2-1 c)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the second terminal to exemplify one scenario 2-1c of mode B. In this scenario, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the second terminal, and parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on parameters of SLDRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 9c, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s901c: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
The specific manner can be seen in S901a.
S902c: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific way, see S902a.
S903c: the network device sends the third configuration information 1 to the first terminal.
The network device determines parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal in the current scene according to a preset mode or based on the requirement of the current service, and determines parameters of Uu DRX (parameters of third DRX) of the first terminal based on the parameters of fourth DRX through the network device. Thus, the network device may generate the third configuration information 1 accordingly.
Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may be further used to indicate that the third configuration information 1 is used by the second terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the third configuration information. Wherein the third configuration information 1 may be used for the second terminal to obtain the third configuration information. That is, the third configuration information 1 may be part or all of the third configuration information, which is not limited herein. The content in the third configuration information 1 may be determined according to specific needs. For example, when the third configuration information 1 is transmitted separately from QoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal may not be carried in the third configuration information 1 as compared with the third configuration information obtained by the second terminal.
For example, after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection, the network device may send third configuration information 1 to the first terminal, for indicating the second terminal to configure parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
S904c: the first terminal sends the third configuration information 2 to the second terminal.
In one possible implementation, the third configuration information 2 includes: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 2 may further include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. Thus, the second terminal obtains the third configuration information after obtaining the third configuration information 2.
In some embodiments, the first terminal generates third configuration information 2 according to the received third configuration information 1, and the content in the third configuration information 2 may refer to the third configuration information 1, where a difference is that the third configuration information 2 indicates that the first terminal generates by the network device.
In other embodiments, the second terminal may also send a request message to the first terminal, where the request message is used to obtain third configuration information 2 configured by the first terminal for the second terminal.
S905c: the second terminal obtains third configuration information.
The content of the specific third configuration information may be referred to S903a, which is not described herein.
S906c: and the second terminal determines parameters of the fourth DRX according to the third configuration information.
The manner of determining the parameters of the fourth DRX may be referred to S904a.
S907c: the second terminal transmits parameters of the fourth DRX to the first terminal.
Alternatively, the network device may send the second configuration request 2 to the second terminal through the first terminal to obtain the second configuration information 2. For example, the second configuration information 2 may include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX. Thus, the network device may preferentially configure the parameters of the third DRX that are close to or meet the preference information of the parameters of the third DRX based on the preference information of the parameters of the third DRX. The second configuration information 2 may be transmitted separately from the fourth DRX parameter, or may be transmitted together, which is not limited herein.
S908c: the first terminal may also send parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device.
Alternatively, the network device may send a second configuration request 1 to the first terminal, where the second configuration request 1 is used to request to obtain the second configuration information 1. Thus, the first terminal generates the second configuration information according to the second configuration request 1, and sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device. For example, the second configuration information 1 may include: the setting manner of the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may specifically refer to the setting manner of the preference information of the parameter of the first DRX. Thus, the network device may preferentially configure the parameters of the third DRX that are close to or meet the preference information of the parameters of the third DRX based on the preference information of the parameters of the third DRX.
The second configuration information 1 may be transmitted separately from the fourth DRX parameter, or may be transmitted together, which is not limited herein. For example, the second configuration information 1 may be transmitted to the network device by the first terminal through an RRC message. The transmission manner of the second configuration information 1 may refer to the transmission manner of the first configuration information 1, which is not described herein.
S909c: the network device obtains second configuration information.
The network device may generate the second configuration information according to other information stored in the network device.
Optionally, the network device may further generate the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1 and other information stored in the network device. The content of the specific second configuration information may be referred to S908a, which is not described herein.
S9010c: and the network equipment determines the parameters of the third DRX according to the second configuration information.
The specific manner of determining the parameters of the third DRX may be referred to S909a, and will not be described herein.
S9011c: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
By the method of example 4, after the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal, the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal are configured based on the second terminal, and the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured based on the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal by the network device, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the activation period of Uu DRX in the activation period of SLDRX, and when the SL DRX and the Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network device on the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of resource scheduling are improved.
Example 5.1 (scenario 2-2 a)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX for the first terminal to configure the second terminal exemplify one scenario 2-2a of mode B. In this scenario, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the first terminal, and parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 10a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S1001a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1002a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1003a: the first terminal obtains third configuration information.
The first terminal may determine, according to a predetermined manner or based on a requirement of a current service, a current scenario in which the first terminal configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the first terminal, and determine, by the network device, parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal (parameters of third DRX) based on the parameters of fourth DRX. Accordingly, the first terminal may determine third configuration information for performing S1004a to configure parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection.
In one possible implementation, the third configuration information may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the fourth DRX, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send a third configuration request 1 to the network device, where the third configuration request 1 is used to request to obtain the third configuration information 1. The first terminal may determine the requested third configuration information 1 according to specific needs. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The third configuration information 1 may be part or all of the third configuration information, which is not limited herein.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send a third configuration request 2 to the second terminal, where the third configuration request 2 is used to request to obtain third configuration information 2. The first terminal may determine the requested third configuration information 2 according to specific needs. Alternatively, the third configuration information 2 may include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX.
S1004a: and the first terminal determines parameters of fourth DRX of the second terminal according to the third configuration information.
Wherein the first terminal may determine parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal with reference to mode B. In one possible implementation, the first terminal may determine the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal according to QoS information of the SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal.
S1005a: the first terminal transmits parameters of the fourth DRX to the second terminal.
S1006a: the second terminal sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device.
The second configuration information 1 is used for requesting the network device to determine parameters of the third DRX based on parameters of the fourth DRX.
In some embodiments, the second configuration information 1 may include: parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information 1 may further include at least one of: qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, or preference information of parameters of the third DRX.
Optionally, the first terminal may also send a second configuration request 2 to the second terminal, where the second configuration request 2 is used to obtain the second configuration information 2. Accordingly, the first terminal may generate the second configuration information 2 according to the second configuration request 2. Optionally, the second configuration information 2 may include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX. The content of the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may specifically refer to the content of the preference information of the parameter of the above-mentioned determination DRX, which is not limited herein. Thus, the first terminal can generate the first configuration information 1 from the second configuration information 2. The content of the second configuration information 1 may refer to the content of the second configuration information 1, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the first terminal sends parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device. The parameters of the second configuration information 1 and the fourth DRX may be separately transmitted, may be partially transmitted together, or may be transmitted together, and are not limited herein.
S1007a: the network device obtains second configuration information.
The content of the second configuration information may refer to S907a, and will not be described herein.
S1008a: and the network equipment determines the parameters of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the second configuration information.
The method for determining the parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information may refer to the method for determining the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in S909a, which is not described herein.
S1009a: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
Example 5.2 (scenario 2-2 b)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one scenario 2-2B of mode B is illustrated by a parameter of SL DRX where the first terminal configures the second terminal. In this scenario, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the first terminal, and parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 10b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1001b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1002b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
S1003b: the second terminal sends the third configuration information 2 to the first terminal.
The second terminal determines parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) configured for the first terminal by the current scene according to a pre-agreed mode or based on the requirement of the current service, and determines parameters of Uu DRX (parameters of third DRX) of the first terminal based on the parameters of fourth DRX through the network equipment. Accordingly, the second terminal may generate the third configuration information 2 accordingly. Optionally, the second terminal device may also send third configuration information 2 to the first terminal. Wherein the third configuration information 2 may be used to instruct the first terminal to determine parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Wherein the third configuration information 2 may be used for the first terminal to obtain the third configuration information. That is, the third configuration information 2 may be part or all of the content of the third configuration information, which is not limited herein. The content in the third configuration information 2 may be determined according to specific needs. Alternatively, the third configuration information 2 may include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the fourth DRX, which is not described herein.
For example, the third configuration information 2 may be transmitted to the first terminal through an RRC message by the second terminal.
S1004b: the first terminal obtains third configuration information.
In some embodiments, the first terminal may determine the third configuration information according to the third configuration information 2.
In one possible implementation, the third configuration information may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the fourth DRX, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send a third configuration request 1 to the network device according to the third configuration request 2, where the third configuration request 1 is used to request to obtain the third configuration information 1. The first terminal may determine to request the third configuration information 1 according to specific needs. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The third configuration information 1 may be part or all of the third configuration information, which is not limited herein.
S1005b: the first terminal determines parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Wherein the first terminal may determine parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal with reference to mode B. In one possible implementation, the first terminal may determine the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal according to QoS information of the SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal.
S1006b: the first terminal transmits parameters of the fourth DRX to the second terminal.
S1007b: the second terminal sends the second configuration information 2 to the first terminal.
The second terminal determines parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the first terminal in the current scenario, and determines parameters of Uu DRX (parameters of third DRX) for the first terminal based on the parameters of fourth DRX through the network device. Thus, the second terminal may also generate the second configuration information 2. Wherein the second configuration information 2 may be used to request the network device to determine parameters of the third DRX of the first terminal based on the second configuration information.
Optionally, the second configuration information 2 may further include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX. The content of the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may specifically refer to the preference information of the parameter of the first DRX.
S1008b: the first terminal sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device according to the second configuration information 2.
The first terminal may generate the first configuration information 1 according to the second configuration information 2. The second configuration information 1 is used to request the network device to determine parameters of the third DRX based on the parameters of the fourth DRX. The first configuration information 1 includes parameters of the fourth DRX.
Optionally, the second configuration information 1 may further include at least one of: qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, or preference information of parameters of the third DRX. The content of the second configuration information 1 may refer to the content of the second configuration information 1 in S907a, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the first terminal sends parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device. The parameters of the second configuration information 1 and the fourth DRX may be separately transmitted, may be partially transmitted together, or may be transmitted together, and are not limited herein.
S1009b: the network device obtains the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1.
The content of the second configuration information may refer to S1007a, and will not be described here.
S1010b: and the network equipment determines the parameters of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the second configuration information.
The method for determining the parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information may refer to the method for determining the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in S1008a, which is not described herein.
S1011b: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
Example 5.3 (scenario 2-2 c)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, one scenario 2-2c of mode B is illustrated by a parameter of SL DRX where the first terminal configures the second terminal. In this scenario, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the first terminal, and parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 10c, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1001c: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1002c: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
S1003c: the network device sends the third configuration information 1 to the first terminal.
The network device determines parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the first terminal according to a preset mode or based on the requirement of current service, and determines parameters of Uu DRX (parameters of third DRX) of the first terminal based on the parameters of fourth DRX through the network device. Thus, the network device may generate the third configuration information 1 accordingly. Wherein the third configuration information 1 may be used to instruct the first terminal to determine parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Wherein the third configuration information 1 may be used for the first terminal to obtain the third configuration information. That is, the third configuration information 1 may be part or all of the third configuration information, which is not limited herein. The content in the third configuration information 1 may be determined according to specific needs. Alternatively, the third configuration information 1 may include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the fourth DRX, which is not described herein.
For example, the third configuration information 1 may be sent by the network device to the first terminal through an RRC message.
S1004c: the first terminal obtains third configuration information according to the third configuration information 1.
In some embodiments, the first terminal may determine the third configuration information according to the third configuration information 1.
Wherein the third configuration information may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the fourth DRX, which is not described herein.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send a third configuration request 2 to the second terminal, where the third configuration request 2 is used to request to obtain third configuration information 2. Optionally, the third configuration information 2 may include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. Thus, the first terminal may determine the third configuration information according to the third configuration information 1 and the third configuration information 2.
S1005c: the first terminal determines parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Wherein the first terminal may determine parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal with reference to mode B. In one possible implementation, the first terminal may determine the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal according to QoS information of the SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal.
S1006c: the first terminal transmits parameters of the fourth DRX to the second terminal.
S1007c: the first terminal transmits parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device.
S1008c: the network device obtains second configuration information.
The network device may obtain the second configuration information through a parameter of the fourth DRX sent by the first terminal and an obtained time interval of the network device.
Optionally, the network device may further send a second configuration request 1 to the first terminal, where the second configuration request 1 is used to obtain the second configuration information 1. The second configuration information 1 may include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX and/or QoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal. Optionally, the first terminal may also send a second configuration request 2 to the second terminal to obtain second configuration information 2. Wherein, the second configuration information 2 may include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX configured by the second terminal. Thus, the second configuration information 1 generated by the first terminal may include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX configured by the first terminal or the second terminal and/or QoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal.
Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: one or more of parameters of the first DRX, qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of parameters of the third DRX, and the like. Reference may be made to the embodiment of S706a, and details are not repeated here.
Optionally, the first terminal sends parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX, the QoS information of the SL service between the first terminal and the second terminal, or the parameter of the fourth DRX may be separately transmitted, may be partially transmitted together, or may be transmitted together, and is not limited herein.
The content of the second configuration information may refer to S1007a, and will not be described here.
S1009c: and the network equipment determines the parameters of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the second configuration information.
The method for determining the parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information may refer to the method for determining the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in S1008a, which is not described herein.
S1010c: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
By the above method of example 5, after the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal, the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal are configured based on the first terminal, and the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured based on the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal by the network device, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the active period of Uu DRX in the active period of SL DRX, and when the SL DRX and Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network device on the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of resource scheduling are improved.
Example 6.1 (scenario 2-3 a)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX configuring the second terminal by the network device exemplify one possible scenario 2-3a of mode B. In this scenario, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the network device, and parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 11a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S1101a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1102a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1103a: the first terminal sends the third configuration information 1 to the network device.
The first terminal may determine that the current scenario is a scenario in which the network device configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal according to a predetermined manner or based on a requirement of a current service, and determine parameters of third DRX based on the parameters of fourth DRX, and further, the first terminal may generate third configuration information 1. Wherein, the third configuration information 1 is used for requesting the network device to determine parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. For example, after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection, the first terminal may send third configuration information 1 to the network device, where the third configuration information is used to request the second terminal to configure parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send a third configuration request 2 to the second terminal, where the third configuration request 2 is used to request to obtain third configuration information 2. Wherein, the third configuration information 2 may include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX configured by the second terminal. Thus, the first terminal may generate the third configuration information 1 according to the third configuration information 2.
S1104a: the network device obtains third configuration information according to the third configuration information 1.
Wherein the third configuration information may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The content of the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the second DRX, which is not described herein.
S1105a: the network device determines parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal.
At this time, the parameter of the fourth DRX may be a parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal determined by the network device based on the third configuration information. In one possible implementation, the network device may determine the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal according to QoS information of the SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal. The specific implementation process may refer to S704a, S704B or mode B, and will not be described herein.
S1106a: the network device transmits parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal to the first terminal.
S1107a: the first terminal transmits parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal to the network device.
S1108a: the first terminal sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device.
The first terminal determines that the current scenario is that the network device configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal, and determines parameters of third DRX based on the parameters of fourth DRX. Therefore, after receiving the parameter of the fourth DRX, the first terminal may generate the second configuration information 1 and send the second configuration information 1 to the network device. Wherein the second configuration information 1 may be used to request the network device to determine parameters of a third DRX of the first terminal based on the second configuration information.
Optionally, the second configuration information 1 may further include: the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may specifically refer to the preference information of the parameter of the first DRX in S604 c. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may be generated by the first terminal or generated by the second terminal. For example, the first terminal may also send a second configuration request 2 to the second terminal, where the second configuration request 2 is used to request obtaining the second configuration information 2. Wherein, the second configuration information 2 may include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX configured by the second terminal. Thus, the first terminal can generate the second configuration information 1 from the second configuration information 2.
The specific manner in which the first terminal generates and sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device may refer to the step of the second configuration information 1 above, which is not described herein again.
S1109a: the network device obtains the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1.
After receiving the second configuration information 1, the network device determines that the current scenario is a scenario in which parameters of the third DRX are determined based on parameters of the fourth DRX, and thus, the network device determines the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1 sent by the first terminal and the parameters determined by itself (for example, parameters and time intervals of the fourth DRX).
In one possible implementation, the second configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the fourth DRX of the second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX.
Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: one or more of parameters of the first DRX, qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of parameters of the third DRX, and the like. Reference may be made to the embodiment of S706a, and details are not repeated here.
S1110a: and the network equipment determines the parameter of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
The method for determining the parameter of the third DRX according to the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal may refer to the method for determining the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in the above S909a, which is not described herein.
S1111a: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
Example 6.2 (scenario 2-3 b)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX configuring the second terminal by the network device exemplify one possible scenario 2-3B of mode B. In this scenario, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the network device, and parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 11b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1101b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1102b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1103b: the second terminal sends the third configuration information 2 to the first terminal.
The second terminal may determine, according to a predetermined manner or based on a requirement of a current service, that the current scenario is a scenario in which the network device configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal, and determine parameters of third DRX based on the parameters of fourth DRX, and further, the second terminal may generate third configuration information 2. Wherein the third configuration information 2 is used for requesting the network device to determine parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information 2 may further include: the setting manner and the content of the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the setting manner and the content of the preference information of the parameter of the first DRX.
S1104b: the first terminal sends the third configuration information 1 to the network device.
After the first terminal receives the second configuration information 2, the first terminal may generate second configuration information 1 according to the second configuration information 2, so that the network device determines, based on the second configuration information 1, that the current scenario is that the network device configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal, and determines parameters of third DRX based on the parameters of fourth DRX.
Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. For example, after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection, the first terminal may send third configuration information 1 to the network device, where the third configuration information is used to information the second terminal to configure parameters of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
S1105b: the network device obtains third configuration information according to the third configuration information 1.
Wherein the third configuration information may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The content of the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the second DRX, which is not described herein.
S1106b: the network device determines parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal.
At this time, the parameter of the fourth DRX may be a parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal determined by the network device based on the third configuration information. In one possible implementation, the network device may determine the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal according to QoS information of the SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal. The specific implementation process may refer to mode B, and will not be described herein.
S1107b: the network device transmits parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal to the first terminal.
S1108b: the first terminal transmits parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal to the second terminal.
S1109b: the second terminal sends the second configuration information 2 to the first terminal.
The second terminal may determine, according to a predetermined manner or based on a requirement of a current service, that the current scenario is that the network device configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal, and determine, based on the parameters of fourth DRX, a scenario of parameters of third DRX, and thus, after receiving the parameters of fourth DRX, the second terminal may generate second configuration information 2, and send the second configuration information 2 to the first terminal. Wherein the second configuration information 2 may be used for the information network device to determine parameters of a third DRX of the first terminal based on the second configuration information.
S1110b: the first terminal sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device.
Optionally, the second configuration information 1 may further include: the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may specifically refer to the preference information of the parameter of the first DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may be generated by the first terminal or may be generated by the second terminal, which is not limited herein. The specific manner in which the first terminal generates and sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device may refer to the step of the second configuration information 1 above, which is not described herein again.
S1111b: the network device obtains the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1.
After receiving the second configuration information 1, the network device determines that the current scenario is a scenario in which parameters of the third DRX are determined based on parameters of the fourth DRX, and thus, the network device determines the second configuration information according to the second configuration information 1 sent by the first terminal and the parameters determined by itself (for example, parameters and time intervals of the fourth DRX).
In one possible implementation, the second configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the fourth DRX of the second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX.
Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: one or more of parameters of the first DRX, qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of parameters of the third DRX, and the like. Reference may be made specifically to the embodiment of S1109a, and no further description is given here.
S11012b: and the network equipment determines the parameter of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
The method for determining the parameter of the third DRX according to the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal may refer to the method for determining the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in the above S909a, which is not described herein.
S11013b: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
Example 6.3 (scenario 2-3 c)
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. In this example, the parameters of SL DRX configuring the second terminal by the network device exemplify one possible scenario 2-3a of mode B. In this scenario, parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are configured by the network device, and parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured by the network device based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 11c, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1101c: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1102c: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
S1103c: the network device obtains third configuration information.
Wherein the third configuration information may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information may further include preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. The content of the preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may refer to the preference information of the parameter of the second DRX, which is not described herein.
In other embodiments, the network device may send a third configuration request 1 to the first terminal, where the third configuration request 1 is used to obtain third configuration information 1. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may include: qoS information for SL traffic between a first terminal and a second terminal. Optionally, the third configuration information 1 may further include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX. Optionally, the first terminal may further send a third configuration request 2 to the second terminal, where the third configuration request 2 is used to request to obtain third configuration information 2. For example, the third configuration information 2 may include: preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX configured by the second terminal. Thus, the first terminal may generate the third configuration information 1 according to the third configuration information 2.
S1104c: the network device determines parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal.
At this time, the parameter of the fourth DRX may be a parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal determined by the network device based on the third configuration information. In one possible implementation, the network device may determine the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal according to QoS information of the SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal. The specific implementation process may refer to mode B, and will not be described herein.
S1105c: the network device transmits parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal to the first terminal.
S1106c: the first terminal transmits parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal to the second terminal.
S1107c: the network device obtains second configuration information.
The network device determines that the current scenario is that the network device configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal, and determines parameters of third DRX based on the parameters of fourth DRX. Thus, the network device may generate the second configuration information after determining the parameters of the fourth DRX.
In some embodiments, the network device determines the second configuration information based on its own determined parameters (e.g., parameters and time intervals for the fourth DRX).
In one possible implementation, the second configuration information may include: parameters and time intervals of the fourth DRX of the second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX. Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: one or more of parameters of the first DRX, qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of parameters of the third DRX, and the like. Reference may be made to the embodiment of S706a, and details are not repeated here.
In other embodiments, the network device may also send a second configuration request 1 to the first terminal, where the second configuration request 1 is used to obtain the second configuration information 1. The second configuration information 1 may include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX. The preference information of the parameter of the third DRX may be generated by the first terminal or generated by the second terminal. For example, the first terminal may also send a second configuration request 2 to the second terminal, where the second configuration request 2 is used to request preference information for obtaining parameters of the third DRX configured by the second terminal. The specific manner in which the first terminal generates and sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device may refer to the step of the second configuration information 1 above, which is not described herein again.
S1108c: and the network equipment determines the parameter of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal.
The method for determining the parameter of the third DRX according to the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal may refer to the method for determining the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in the above S909a, which is not described herein.
S1109c: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
By the method of example 6, after the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal, the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal are configured based on the network device, and the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal are configured based on the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal through the network device, so that the second terminal can receive the SCI sent by the first terminal in the active period of the Uu DRX in the active period of the SL DRX, and when the SL DRX and the Uu DRX are used simultaneously, the scheduling of the network device on the side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal is facilitated, and the performance and the resource utilization rate of the resource scheduling are improved.
In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal 102 may also establish multiple side links with multiple terminals (for example, the terminal 104 or the terminal 105), where the parameter SLDRX of the terminal 102 may refer to a parameter of DRX used when performing side link communication between the terminal 101 and the terminal 102. The parameters of SL DRX of terminal 102 may also include parameters of multiple SL DRX, where each parameter of SL DRX is an SL DRX parameter used by terminal 102 to transmit with an SL link established by the terminal.
A possible scenario is that, as shown in fig. 12a, after a first terminal establishes a connection with a second terminal 1 and a second terminal 2, if period 1 of SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1 and period 2 of SL DRX2 of the second terminal 2 differ significantly, this may cause the first terminal to need to configure Uu DRX with a longer activation period for the first terminal in order to receive SL resources for scheduling these second terminals, and for Uu DRX of the first terminal, this results in higher power consumption of the terminal. Or due to excessive SLDRX period differences of a plurality of second terminals, the first terminal cannot be successfully configured with the proper Uu DRX parameters.
In addition, after the first terminal establishes a connection with the plurality of second terminals, if the period 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1 and the period 2 of Uu DRX2 of the first terminal 2 differ greatly (for example, as shown in fig. 12B), in order to ensure normal communication of the plurality of side uplinks between the first terminal and the plurality of second terminals, if the execution mode B determines the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. One possible implementation is to determine the parameters of Uu DRX of a set of first terminals based on the parameters of SL DRX of each set of second terminals, e.g. as shown in fig. 12 b. I.e. the first terminal needs to set 2 sets of parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal, i.e. parameters of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal and parameters of Uu DRX2 of the first terminal. Another possible implementation is to determine the parameters of Uu DRX of a set of first terminals based on the parameters of SL DRX of a plurality of sets of second terminals, for example as shown in fig. 12 c. That is, in a set of Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal that needs to be set by the first terminal, a longer activation period may need to be set, which may also cause excessive power consumption of the first terminal.
Therefore, in this scenario, the coordination policy that may be selected may be to determine the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal first, and then determine the parameters of SL DRX of each second terminal based on the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal. Therefore, parameters of SL DRX of a plurality of sets of second terminals are relatively close, and when the first terminal communicates with the plurality of second terminals, the duration of the activation period can be reduced better. As shown in fig. 12d, the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal are determined, and then the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal 1 and the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal 2 are determined according to the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
A possible situation is that, as shown in fig. 12e, after the first terminal 1 and the first terminal 2 establish a connection with the second terminal 1, if the period 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1 and the period 2 of Uu DRX2 of the first terminal 2 differ greatly, this may result in that the second terminal may have a longer activation period of SL DRX1 parameters of the second terminal 1 in order to receive the scheduling information of these first terminals, resulting in a higher power consumption of the terminal. Or due to too large Uu DRX cycle differences of the plurality of first terminals, the second terminal cannot be successfully configured with the appropriate SL DRX parameters.
After the second terminal establishes a connection with the plurality of first terminals (e.g., the second terminal establishes a side link with the first terminal 1 and the first terminal 2 as shown in fig. 12 e), if the period 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1 and the period 2 of Uu DRX2 of the first terminal 2 differ greatly (e.g., as shown in fig. 12 f), one possible implementation is to determine a set of parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of Uu DRX of each set of first terminals in determining the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminals in order to ensure normal communication of the plurality of side links between the second terminal and the plurality of first terminals, for example, as shown in fig. 12 e. That is, the second terminal needs to set 2 sets of parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal, that is, set SL DRX1 of the second terminal and SL DRX2 of the second terminal, and the second terminal needs to wake up to receive the scheduling information during the active period of the 2 sets of parameters of the SL DRX, respectively. Another possible implementation is to determine parameters of SL DRX of a set of second terminals based on parameters of Uu DRX of a plurality of sets of first terminals, for example as shown in fig. 12 g. I.e. the second terminal needs to set a longer activation period in the parameters of SLDRX of the set of second terminals, and may also cause excessive power consumption of the second terminals.
Therefore, in this scenario, the coordination policy that may be selected may be, for example, as shown in fig. 12h, to determine the parameter of SL DRX of the second terminal (parameter 1 of SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1) first, and then determine parameter 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1 based on the parameter of SL DRX of the second terminal (parameter 1 of SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1). Based on the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal (parameter 1 of the SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1), parameter 2 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 2 is determined. Therefore, the parameters of Uu DRX of a plurality of sets of first terminals are relatively close, and when the first terminals communicate with a plurality of second terminals, the duration of the activation period of the second terminals can be reduced better.
In another possible scenario, a plurality of side links are established between a plurality of first terminals and a plurality of second terminals, for example, as shown in fig. 12i, the first terminal 1 establishes a downlink 1 with the network device, and configures parameter 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1 accordingly. The first terminal 2 establishes a downlink 2 with the network device and configures parameters 2 of Uu DRX2 of the first terminal 2 accordingly.
One possible implementation manner, the first terminal 1 and the second terminal 1 establish the side uplink 1, the first terminal 2 and the second terminal 1 establish the side uplink 3, and the parameters of SL DRX for the second terminal 1 may be parameters based on the parameter 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1 and the parameter 2 of Uu DRX2 of the first terminal 2, where 2 sets of parameters of SL DRX are configured respectively. The parameter of 1 set of SL DRX may be configured based on the parameter 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1 and the parameter 2 of Uu DRX2 of the first terminal 2.
In another possible implementation, the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be determined based on the side-links preferentially. For example, the first terminal 1 and the second terminal 1 establish the side uplink 1 and configure the parameter 1 of the SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1 accordingly. The first terminal 1 and the second terminal 2 establish the side uplink 2 and configure the parameters 2 of the SL DRX2 of the second terminal 2 accordingly. The first terminal 2 and the second terminal 1 establish a side uplink 3 and configure the parameter 3 of the SL DRX3 of the second terminal 1 accordingly. The first terminal 2 and the second terminal 2 establish a side uplink 4 and configure the parameters 4 of the SL DRX4 of the second terminal 2 accordingly. When it is determined that the parameter 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1 cannot be matched with the parameter 1 of SL DRX1 and the parameter 2 of SL DRX2, the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal may be adjusted based on the parameters of SL DRX configured by the second terminal, respectively.
Consider a scenario in which a downlink or side-link between a plurality of first terminals and a plurality of second terminals may change. A possible scenario when a new second terminal joins an already matched stable connection, e.g. the second terminal 3 joins the scenario as shown in fig. 12i, at which time the second terminal 3 establishes a side-link with the first terminal 1. The parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal 3 may be determined by the second terminal 3 based on the configured parameters 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1. Or the second terminal 3 may also determine the parameter of SL DRX of the second terminal 3 based on the configured parameter 1 of Uu DRX1 of the first terminal 1, the configured parameter 1 of SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1, the configured parameter 2 of SL DRX2 of the second terminal 2, the configured parameter 3 of SL DRX3 of the second terminal 1, and the configured parameter 4 of SL DRX4 of the second terminal 2.
A possible scenario when a new first terminal joins an already matched stable connection, e.g. the first terminal 3 joins the scenario as shown in fig. 12i, where the first terminal 3 establishes a downlink with the network device and the first terminal 3 establishes a side-downlink with the second terminal 1. At this time, the parameter 3 of Uu DRX3 of the first terminal 3 may be determined by the network device based on the parameter 1 of SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1 and the parameter 3 of SL DRX3 of the second terminal 1. The parameter 3 of Uu DRX3 of the first terminal 3 may be determined based on the parameter 1 of SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1 and the parameter 3 of SL DRX3 of the second terminal 1, or may be determined by other means, which is not limited herein.
In summary, in a scenario for multiple downlinks or multiple side links, multiple policies may be set, determining whether to employ mode a or mode B, to achieve optimization of parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal and parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. Of course, the optimization of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal and SL DRX of the second terminal may also be achieved in other ways. For example, after determining the parameters of Uu DRX of a plurality of first terminals and the parameters of SL DRX of a plurality of second terminals in a plurality of downlink or side links, the adjustment priorities of the parameters of Uu DRX of the plurality of first terminals and the parameters of SL DRX of the plurality of second terminals may be determined. For example, among the parameters of the SL DRX of the plurality of second terminals, the parameter 1 of the SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1 may be set to have the largest difference from the parameters of the SL DRX of other second terminals, and the adjustment priority of the parameter 1 of the SL DRX1 of the second terminal 1 may be set to be the highest. Therefore, the Uu DRX parameters of the plurality of first terminals and the SL DRX parameters of the plurality of second terminals can be adjusted according to the order of adjusting the priority, and the Uu DRX parameters of the plurality of first terminals and the SL DRX parameters of the plurality of second terminals are prevented from being reset.
In the following, the optimization of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal and the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal is illustrated in a scenario of multiple downlinks or multiple side downlinks using either mode a or mode B. Other ways may be referred to this example and will not be described here.
In one possible implementation manner, the second terminal may determine whether to implement the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal and the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in the manner a or in the manner B according to a connection state between the second terminal and other terminals (the other terminals are terminals that establish a side uplink with the second terminal).
For example, when it is determined that the second terminal is not connected to the other terminal, either mode a or mode B may be arbitrarily selected.
For example, when it is determined that the second terminal is connected to the fourth terminal and the fourth terminal is not connected to the network device, the current scenario may be determined to be the scenario of the terminals of the plurality of receiving ends and the scenario of the terminals of the 1 transmitting end, and at this time, the policy may be determined to be the mode a. For example, when it is determined that the second terminal is connected to the fourth terminal and the fourth terminal is connected to the network device, the current scenario may be determined as a scenario of a plurality of terminals of the transmitting end and a scenario of a terminal of 1 receiving end, and a policy may be determined as a scenario B.
In another possible implementation manner, the second terminal may send the first indication information to the first terminal, considering that there may be a plurality of second terminals.
The first indication information may include: and the connection state between the second terminal and other terminals.
For example, the first indication information may include: the second terminal does not establish a side uplink with other terminals;
The second terminal establishes a side uplink with other terminals;
And the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
Or the first indication information may further include at least one of: parameters of Uu DRX of other terminals, or parameters of SL DRX of other terminals.
It should be noted that, the second terminal may send the first indication information while the first terminal and the second terminal successfully establish the SL connection, where the first indication information is sent through a connection establishment completion message; the second terminal may also send the first indication information after the first terminal completes the SL connection with the second terminal, where the first indication information may be sent through a RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
For example, the first indication information may carry a first field for indicating the number of connections and the state of the connection of the second terminal with other terminals. Alternatively, the first field may be used when the second terminal is a terminal of the receiving end, and at this time, a second field may be further set, where the second field indicates the number of connections and the connection status of the second terminal with other terminals when the second terminal is a terminal of the transmitting end. The first field may be used to indicate the number of connections and the connection status of the second terminal with other terminals, without distinguishing whether the second terminal is a receiving end or a transmitting end.
The number of connections and the states of the connections of the second terminal with other terminals may be indicated by the first indication information in various ways, and are exemplified in ways 1 to 3 below.
Mode 1, a first field is used to indicate whether a second terminal has a connection with another terminal in addition to the first terminal.
One possible implementation may set the first field to 1bit. At this time, 0 in the first field may be set, indicating that the second terminal has not established a side uplink with other terminals than the first terminal as a receiving end. A1 in the first field may be set indicating that the second terminal has a side uplink established with other terminals in addition to the first terminal.
In another possible implementation, the first field may be set to wire/false. For example, the second terminal sends the first indication information with the value of true, which indicates that the second terminal has other SL connections, and the second terminal does not send the first indication information with the value of true, which indicates that the second terminal does not have other SL connections.
In mode 2, a first field may be set to indicate the number of sidestream connections established between the second terminal and other terminals, except for the first terminal. For example, when the indication carried in the first field is 0, it indicates that the second terminal does not establish a side uplink with other terminals than the first terminal. When the indication carried by the first field is 1, it means that the second terminal establishes a side uplink with 1 terminal except the first terminal. When the indication carried by the first field is 2, it means that the second terminal establishes a side uplink with 2 terminals in addition to the first terminal.
Mode 3, first indication information for indicating parameters of SL DRX of other terminals.
In one possible implementation, the first indication information may include fourth configuration information.
The fourth configuration information is used to carry parameters of SL DRX of other terminals. The fourth configuration information may be null when the second terminal does not have a connection with the other terminal.
When the second terminal has connection with other terminals, the fourth configuration information may carry the identifier of the terminal and the parameter of the SL DRX of the terminal, where the identifier of the terminal may be a layer 2 identifier of the terminal, or may be an index of the terminal at the second terminal. When there are a plurality of other terminals, the fourth configuration information may carry the identifiers of the plurality of other terminals and the parameters of SL DRX of the plurality of other terminals.
When a side link exists between the second terminal and other terminals and a corresponding parameter of SL DRX is further set on the side link, the parameter may be used to configure the parameter of SL DRX of the second terminal, or may be used to configure the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal. Therefore, when the first terminal or the network device needs to determine the parameters of SLDRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminal, the parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminal may be transmitted to the first terminal or the network device. Or when the first terminal or the network device needs to determine the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal based on the SL DRX parameters of the other terminals, the SL DRX parameters of the other terminals may be sent to the first terminal or the network device.
The parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminal are indicated by the direct frame number, and the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal are indicated by the system frame number, and when the first terminal or the network device needs to determine the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminal, the parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminal may be converted into parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminal indicated by the system frame number according to the slot offset between the direct frame number and the system frame number on the side link. The parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminal may be directly transmitted according to the time slot offset between the system frame number and the direct frame number on the side link.
Taking into account the connection state between the second terminal and other terminals, which the first terminal may receive the transmissions of the plurality of second terminals, and the parameters of SL DRX of the other terminals. At this time, the first terminal may set multiple policies, determine whether to use mode a or mode B or other modes, and better optimize the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal and the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal.
Taking the first terminal as the first terminal 1 and the second terminal as the second terminal 1 as an example, the first terminal 1 knows whether one or more first terminals (for example, the first terminal 2 and the first terminal 3) except the first terminal 1 are connected to the second terminal 1 currently according to the first indication information, and the first terminal judges whether one or more second terminals (for example, the second terminal 1, the second terminal 2 and the second terminal 3) are connected to the first terminal.
For example, when the first indication information indicates that no other terminal exists in the second terminal and the first terminal itself is connected to only one second terminal, the current connection state between the first terminal 1 and the second terminal 1 is one-to-one, and the policy at this time may not be limited, or the second terminal may align SL DRX to Uu DRX by default, that is, execute the policy in mode a.
For example, when the first indication information indicates that no other terminal exists in the second terminal 1 and the first terminal itself is connected to a plurality of second terminals (for example, the second terminal 1 and the second terminal 2), the current connection state of the first terminal 1 is one-to-many (as shown in fig. 12 a), and the policy at this time may select the mode a.
For example, when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal 1 has other terminals (for example, the first terminal 2) and the first terminal itself is connected to only one second terminal 1, the current connection state of the first terminal 1 is one-to-many (as shown in fig. 12 e), and the policy may select the mode B.
For example, when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal 1 has other terminals (for example, the first terminal 2) and the first terminal itself is connected to a plurality of second terminals (the second terminal 1 and the second terminal 2), the current connection state of the first terminal 1 is a many-to-many connection state (as shown in fig. 12 i), and the policy at this time may be selected based on the actual situation.
Alternatively, the second terminal may determine whether to use mode a or mode B or other modes directly based on the case of establishing a side uplink with the second terminal, and send the first indication information to the first terminal.
The following is exemplified in ways 4 to 6.
In mode 4, the first indication information may further be used to indicate whether to determine parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal based on parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
In one possible implementation, the first indication information may further include a third field for indicating whether to determine parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal based on parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
For example, in a scenario in which the second terminal is connected to a plurality of other terminals, the second terminal has established the side link 1 with the fourth terminal (first terminal 1), the second terminal has established the side link 2 with the fifth terminal (second terminal 2), and the second terminal has obtained the SL DRX parameter of the fourth terminal, the Uu DRX parameter of the fourth terminal, and the SL DRX parameter of the fifth terminal. Thus, the second terminal can determine whether to adopt mode a or mode B according to the SL DRX parameter of the fourth terminal, the Uu DRX parameter of the fourth terminal, and the SL DRX parameter of the fifth terminal.
As shown in fig. 12j, a possible scenario is that the network device 1 establishes a link 1 with the first terminal 1, the first terminal 1 and the second terminal 1 establish a side-link 1, the first terminal 2 and the second terminal 1 establish a side-link 2, the first terminal 2 establishes a link 2 with the network device 1, the fourth terminal and the second terminal 1 establish a side-link 3, and the fourth terminal establishes a link 3 with the network device 2. The SL link 1 is a newly built link. That is, the SL DRX parameters of the first terminal 2 need to consider SL link 1, SL link 2, and SL link 3. Therefore, it is difficult to determine parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal that meet the requirement, based on parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal 1 (for link 1), uu DRX parameters of the first terminal 2 (for link 2), and SL DRX parameters of the fourth terminal (for SL link 3) transmitted by the network device, as a possible case. And the second terminal can determine a parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal more suitable for the SL link 1, the SL link 2 and the SL link 3 based on the SL DRX parameter of the first terminal 2 and the SL DRX parameter of the fourth terminal, so that the power saving effect of the second terminal is better. At this time, it may be requested to adjust parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
As shown in fig. 12j, a possible scenario is that the network device 1 establishes a link 1 with the first terminal 1, the first terminal 1 and the second terminal 1 establish a side-link 1, the first terminal 2 and the second terminal 1 establish a side-link 2, the first terminal 2 establishes a link 2 with the network device 1, the fourth terminal and the second terminal 1 establish a side-link 3, and the fourth terminal establishes a link 3 with the network device 2. The SL link 1 is a newly built link. In determining the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal (i.e., the second terminal 1) for the corresponding second terminal on the newly-built link, it is difficult to determine the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal 1 satisfying the needs based on the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal 1 (for link 1), the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal 2 (for link 2), the parameters of the Uu DRX of the fourth terminal (for link 3), the SL DRX parameters of the first terminal 2 (for SL link 2), and the SL DRX parameters of the fourth terminal (for SL link 3) transmitted by the network device 1, as a possible case. The second terminal 1 may determine a parameter of SL DRX of the second terminal 1 more suitable for the SL link 1, the SL link 2 and the SL link 3 based on the SL DRX parameter of the first terminal 2 and the SL DRX parameter of the fourth terminal, so that the power saving effect of the second terminal 1 is better. At this time, it may be requested to adjust the parameters of Uu DRX of the corresponding first terminal (first terminal 1) on the newly established link.
In another possible scenario, based on the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal, the SL DRX parameters of the fourth terminal, the Uu DRX parameters of the fourth terminal, and the SL DRX parameters of the fifth terminal, parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal that meet the requirements may be determined. At this time, the second terminal may instruct to determine parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal based on parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
For example, the third field may occupy 1bit, and when the character in the third field is 0, it may indicate that the second terminal instructs not to coordinate the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal, and when the character in the third field is 1, it may indicate that the second terminal instructs to coordinate the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal.
In mode 5, when the character in the third field is 1, it indicates that the second terminal instructs to request reconfiguration of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal.
For another example, the first indication information may be further used to indicate whether to determine parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal based on parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal.
Referring to mode 4, the first indication information may further include a fourth field, the fourth field occupies 1bit, and when a character in the fourth field is 0, it indicates that the second terminal indicates that the Uu DRX parameter of the first terminal is not determined based on the SL DRX parameter of the second terminal, and when a character in the fourth field is 1, it indicates that the second terminal indicates that the Uu DRX parameter of the first terminal is determined based on the SL DRX parameter of the second terminal.
In combination of mode 4 and mode 5, the first indication information may also be used to indicate whether to configure the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal and SL DRX of the second terminal based on mode a or mode B.
At this time, the first indication information may be implemented in a third field or a fourth field, for example, the third field and the fourth field may be the same field, and when a character in the field is 0, it indicates that the second terminal instructs to coordinate the parameters of SLDRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal, and when a character in the field is 1, it indicates that the second terminal instructs to configure or reconfigure the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal based on the parameters of SLDRX of the second terminal.
In this manner, the first indication information may refer to the first configuration request and the second configuration request sent in the above examples, which are not described herein.
In mode 6, the first indication information may further be used to indicate whether the second terminal is able to determine parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal based on the parameters of the Uu DRX of the first terminal.
For example, the first indication information may further include a fifth field, the fifth field occupies 1bit, when a character of the fifth field is 0, it indicates that the second terminal fails to configure the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal, and when a character of the fifth field is 1, it indicates that the second terminal succeeds in configuring the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal.
Optionally, considering that there may be multiple first terminals, the network device may determine whether to use mode a or mode B or other modes based on the current connection situation of the side links of the first terminal and the second terminal, so that parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal and parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are better optimized.
At this time, the second terminal may send the first indication information to the first terminal, and then the first terminal forwards the first indication information to the network device. The content of the first indication information may refer to the above modes 1 to 6, and will not be described herein.
Example 7
When the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal are configured by the second device, in this example, one possible scenario 3 of determining the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal based on the first indication information using mode a is illustrated. In this scenario, the first terminal determines that the current scenario is more suitable for the mode a to be exemplified. The second terminal or the network device determines that the current scenario is more suitable for the scenario of the mode a, and reference may be made to this mode, which is not described here again. The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 13a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1301a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1302a: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
For a specific manner, see S602a.
S1303a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1304a: the second terminal sends first indication information to the first terminal.
Optionally, the second terminal may further send fourth configuration information.
The first indication information and/or the fourth configuration information may be sent to the first terminal through an RRC message, for example RRCReconfigurationSidelink, and the first indication information and/or the fourth configuration information may be located in a new IE, which is not limited herein.
The content carried by the first indication information may be referred to in the above modes 1 to 6, and will not be described herein.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send first request information to the second terminal, where the first request information is used to obtain the first indication information.
S1305a: and the first terminal determines to obtain the first configuration information according to the first indication information.
The first terminal may determine, according to the first indication information, that the current scene is more suitable for the mode a, or the first terminal may further determine, in combination with the current service requirement and the first indication information, that the current scene is more suitable for the mode a. Thus, it is determined whether to instruct the second terminal to determine parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal based on the first configuration information. The content of the first configuration information may be referred to above, and will not be described herein.
In another possible manner, considering that the second terminal determines that the current scenario is more suitable for the mode a according to the first indication information, the second terminal may send the first configuration request 2. The first configuration request 2 is used for indicating the second terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX based on the first configuration information.
In another possible manner, considering that the network device determines that the current scenario is more suitable for mode a according to the first indication information, the network device may send a first configuration request 1. The first configuration request 1 is used for indicating the second terminal to determine parameters of the second DRX based on the first configuration information. The manner in which the specific network device obtains the first indication information is not limited in the present application. May be acquired through the first terminal or acquired through the second terminal.
S1306a: the first terminal sends first configuration information to the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S605a.
S1307a: and the second terminal determines parameters of a second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
In some embodiments, the second terminal determines a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information and the first indication information.
In some embodiments, when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal does not have a connection with another terminal, the second terminal may determine the parameter of the second DRX according to the first configuration information. And when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal is connected with other terminals, the second terminal can determine the parameters of the second DRX according to the first configuration information and the parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminals.
The second terminal may determine the parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the other terminal in the fourth configuration information and the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal in the first configuration information. The determined parameters of the second DRX need to satisfy: the network device may schedule side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal based on the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal and the parameters of the second terminal SLDRX. In addition, normal communication of the side links between the first terminal and the second terminal, and normal communication of the side links between the second terminal and other terminals, are also required to be satisfied. The parameter manner of specifically determining the second DRX of the second terminal may refer to manner a.
S1308a: the second terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
The specific manner can be seen in S607a.
S1309a: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
For a specific manner, see S608a.
Example 8
When the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal are configured by the second terminal, in this example one possible scenario 4 of determining the usage pattern B from the first indication information is illustrated. Considering that determining the current scenario is more suitable for the mode a or the mode B, the method may be determined by a network device, or may be determined by a first terminal, or may be determined by a second terminal. The first terminal determination is taken as an example below, which may be referred to in other ways. The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 13b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1301b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
The specific manner can be seen in S901a.
S1302b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1303b: the second terminal sends first indication information to the first terminal.
Alternatively, the first indication information may include fourth configuration information.
S1304b: and the first terminal determines to obtain third configuration information according to the first indication information.
The first terminal can determine that the current scene is more suitable for the mode B according to the first indication information, or the first terminal can also determine that the current scene is more suitable for the mode B by combining the requirement of the current service and the first indication information. Thus, the first terminal may generate the third configuration information 2 accordingly and transmit the third configuration information 2 to the second terminal. The specific manner in which the first terminal sends the third configuration information 2 may refer to the manner in S903a in the scenario 2, which is not described herein again.
Alternatively, the first terminal may send a request message to the second terminal before S1304b, where the request message is used to obtain the first indication information.
In another possible implementation manner, the second terminal may determine that the current scene is more suitable in mode B according to the first indication information, and send the first indication information to the first terminal.
In another possible implementation manner, the network device may determine that the current scenario is more suitable in mode B according to the first indication information or in combination with the current service requirement, and may generate the third configuration information 1. The third configuration information 1 may be used to instruct the second terminal to determine parameters of the fourth DRX.
S1305b: the second terminal obtains third configuration information.
The process of the second terminal obtaining the third configuration information may refer to S904a, which is not described herein. In addition, the parameters of the fourth DRX may need to be considered, so the third configuration information may further include the first indication information or the fourth configuration information, unlike the third configuration information in S904 a.
S1306b: the second terminal determines parameters of the fourth DRX.
The process of determining the parameter of the fourth DRX by the second terminal may refer to S905a, which is not described herein.
S1307b: the second terminal transmits parameters of the fourth DRX to the first terminal.
S1308b: the first terminal sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device.
The first terminal may determine, according to the first indication information, that the current scene is more suitable for the mode B, and at this time, the first terminal may further send second configuration information 1 to the network device. The second configuration information 1 may be used to instruct the network device to determine parameters of the third DRX of the first terminal based on the second configuration information. The content of the second configuration information 1 may refer to the content of the second configuration information 1 above. Alternatively, the second configuration information 1 may include the first indication information.
Alternatively, the first terminal may send parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device.
The parameter of the fourth DRX and the second configuration information 1 may be transmitted together, may be partially transmitted separately, or may be entirely transmitted separately, which is not limited herein. For example, the parameter of the fourth DRX or the second configuration information 1 may be transmitted to the first terminal through an existing or new RRC message, for example, the first terminal may transmit to the network device through a first IE in UEAssistanceInformation message, sidelinkUEInformationNR message, or UEInformationResponse message. The parameters of the fourth DRX or the second configuration information 1 may be located in the new IE, and the IEs in UEAssistanceInformation may also be multiplexed. For example, the parameter of the fourth DRX or the second configuration information 1 is DRX-PREFERENCEIE. Or the parameter of the fourth DRX or the second configuration information 2 may be located in other IEs in the RRC message, which is not limited herein. The parameter of the fourth DRX or the second configuration information 1 may also be transmitted through a MAC CE or UCI indicating a corresponding function or information, etc., which is not limited herein.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send the first indication information to the network device.
The first indication information may be transmitted to the network device by the first terminal through an existing or new RRC message. For example, the first indication information may be sent by the first terminal to the network device through a first IE in UEAssistanceInformation message, sidelinkUEInformationNR message, or UEInformationResponse message. The first indication information may be located in the new IE, or the IEs in UEAssistanceInformation may be multiplexed, for example, the first indication information is UEAssistanceInformation message DRX-PREFERENCE IE, or the first indication information may be located in other IEs, which are not limited herein. The first indication information may also be transmitted through a MAC CE or UCI indicating the corresponding function or information, etc., without limitation.
In another possible implementation manner, the second terminal may determine that the current scenario is more suitable in mode B according to the first indication information, and send the second configuration information 2 to the first terminal. The second configuration information 2 may be used to instruct the network device to determine parameters of the third DRX based on parameters of the fourth DRX.
In another possible implementation manner, the network device may determine that the current scenario is more suitable in mode B according to the first indication information, so as to obtain the second configuration information accordingly. The second configuration information may be obtained through the first configuration information 1 sent by the first terminal, or may be obtained based on the second configuration information 2 forwarded by the second terminal through the first terminal, which is not limited herein.
S1309b: the network device obtains second configuration information.
The content of the second configuration information and the process of obtaining the second configuration information may refer to S908a, which is not described herein.
The first indication information, the parameter of the fourth DRX, the second configuration information 1, or the fourth configuration information may be transmitted together, may be partially transmitted separately, or may be entirely transmitted separately, and is not limited herein. The specific transmission method refers to step S1308b.
Alternatively, the network device may obtain the first indication information.
Optionally, the network device may further determine that the current scenario is more suitable in mode B according to the first indication information, and generate second configuration information.
S1310b: and the network equipment determines the parameters of the third DRX according to the second configuration information.
The specific determination method may refer to the step of S909b, and will not be described herein.
Optionally, the network device may determine a parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information and the first indication information.
In some embodiments, when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal does not have a connection with another terminal, the network device may determine a parameter of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the second configuration information.
And when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal is connected with other terminals, the network equipment can determine the parameters of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the second configuration information and the parameters of SLDRX of the other terminals.
For example, the network device may determine the parameter of the third DRX based on the SL DRX parameter of the other terminal in the fourth configuration information, the Uu DRX parameter of the other first terminal connected to the network device, and the fourth DRX parameter of the second terminal.
The determined parameters of the third DRX need to satisfy: the network device may schedule side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal based on the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal (parameters of third DRX) and parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal (parameters of fourth DRX). In addition, normal communication of the side links between the first terminal and the second terminal, and normal communication of the side links between the second terminal and other terminals, are also required to be satisfied. The process of determining the parameter of the third DRX by the specific network device according to the second configuration information and the first indication information may be S909a and reference mode B, which are not described herein again.
S1311b: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
Example 9
When the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal are configured by the first terminal, in this example one possible scenario 3 of determining the usage pattern a based on the first indication information is illustrated. The current scene is determined to be more suitable for the mode A or the mode B, and the mode A or the mode B can be determined by network equipment, a first terminal or a second terminal. The first terminal determines the usage pattern a as an example, which may be referred to in other ways.
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 14a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1401a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1402a: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
For a specific manner, see S602a.
S1403a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1404a: the second terminal sends first indication information to the first terminal.
Optionally, the second terminal may further send fourth configuration information.
The content carried by the first indication information may be referred to in the above modes 1 to 6, and will not be described herein.
The first terminal may determine, according to the first indication information, that the current scene is more suitable for the mode a, or the first terminal may further determine, in combination with the current service requirement and the first indication information, that the current scene is more suitable for the mode a. Thus, it is determined whether or not parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal are determined by the first terminal based on the first configuration information. The content of the first configuration information in S704a may be referred to for the first configuration information, which is not described herein.
Alternatively, the first terminal may send a request message to the second terminal before S1404a, the request message being used to acquire the first indication information. Other ways may refer to S1304a, and are not described herein. Other possible ways may refer to the second terminal determining way a or the network device determining way a in example 7, so as to request the first terminal to determine the parameter of the second DRX, which is not described herein.
S1405a: and the first terminal determines to obtain the first configuration information according to the first indication information.
The content and manner of the first terminal obtaining the first configuration information may refer to the manner of S704a in the scenario 1 and the manner of S1305a in the scenario 3, which are not described herein.
S1406a: and the first terminal determines parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information and the first indication information.
In some embodiments, when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal does not have a connection with other terminals, the first terminal may determine parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information. When the first indication information indicates that the second terminal is connected with other terminals, the first terminal can determine parameters of second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information and parameters of SL DRX of other terminals. The parameter manner of specifically determining the second DRX of the second terminal may refer to manner a.
S1407a: the second terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
S1408a: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
Specific modes can be referred to S707a.
Example 10
When the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal are configured by the first terminal, in this example one possible scenario 4 of determining the usage pattern B from the first indication information is illustrated. Considering that it is more appropriate to determine the current scenario in mode a or mode B, it may be determined by the network device, it may be determined by the first terminal, or it may be determined by the second terminal, and hereinafter, the first terminal is taken as an example, and other modes may be referred to as modes. The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 14b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1401b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
The specific manner can be seen in S901a.
S1402b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1403b: the second terminal sends first indication information to the first terminal.
Alternatively, the first indication information may include fourth configuration information.
S1404b: and the first terminal determines to obtain third configuration information according to the first indication information.
The first terminal can determine that the current scene is more suitable for the mode B according to the first indication information, or the first terminal can also determine that the current scene is more suitable for the mode B by combining the requirement of the current service and the first indication information. Thus, the first terminal may generate the third configuration information accordingly. For example, the third configuration information may include: qoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal, preference information of parameters of the fourth DRX, and the like. The process of obtaining the third configuration information by the first terminal may refer to the above, and will not be described herein. In addition, the parameters of the fourth DRX may need to be considered when configuring the fourth DRX, so the third configuration information herein may further include the first indication information and the fourth configuration information.
Other possible ways may refer to example 8 and are not described here.
S1405b: the first terminal determines parameters of the fourth DRX.
The process of determining the fourth DRX parameter by the first terminal may refer to S1004a, which is not described herein.
S1406b: the first terminal transmits parameters of the fourth DRX to the second terminal.
S1407b: the first terminal sends the second configuration information 1 to the network device.
The first terminal may determine, according to the first indication information, a more suitable manner B for the current scene, and generate the second configuration information 1. The second configuration information 1 may be used to instruct the network device to determine parameters of the third DRX according to the second configuration information and the first indication information. Optionally, the second terminal may also send the second configuration information 2 to the first terminal. The first terminal may generate the second configuration information 1 after receiving the second configuration information 2, and send the second configuration information 1 to the network device.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send the first indication information to the network device.
Optionally, the first terminal may also send parameters of the fourth DRX to the network device.
The first instruction information, the fourth configuration information, and the second configuration information 1 may be transmitted together or may be transmitted separately, and are not limited thereto. The specific transmission method refers to step S1308b.
S1408b: the network device obtains second configuration information.
The content of the second configuration information and the process of obtaining the second configuration information may refer to the above, and will not be described herein.
Optionally, the network device may further obtain the first indication information.
S1409b: and the network equipment determines the parameters of the third DRX according to the second configuration information.
The specific determination method may refer to the step of S909b, and will not be described herein.
Optionally, the network device determines a parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information and the first indication information.
In some embodiments, when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal does not have a connection with another terminal, the network device may determine the parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information.
And when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal is connected with other terminals, the network equipment can determine the parameter of the third DRX according to the second configuration information and the parameter of SL DRX of other terminals. For example, the network device may determine the parameter of the third DRX based on the SL DRX parameter of the other terminal in the fourth configuration information, the Uu DRX parameter of the other first terminal connected to the network device, and the fourth DRX parameter of the second terminal.
The determined parameters of the third DRX need to satisfy: the network device may schedule side uplink resources of the first terminal and the second terminal based on the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal (parameters of third DRX) and parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal (parameters of fourth DRX). In addition, normal communication of the side links between the first terminal and the second terminal, and normal communication of the side links between the second terminal and other terminals, are also required to be satisfied. The parameter manner of specifically determining the second DRX of the second terminal may refer to S909a and manner B. The process of determining the parameter of the third DRX by the specific network device according to the second configuration information and the first indication information may refer to mode B, which is not described herein.
S1410b: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
Example 11
When the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal are configured by the network device, in this example one possible scenario 3 of parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal is determined by the network device according to the first indication information usage pattern a. Considering that determining the current scenario is more suitable for the mode a or the mode B, the method may be determined by a network device, or may be determined by a first terminal, or may be determined by a second terminal. In this example, network device determination is taken as the primary example, and reference may be made to this example in other ways.
The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 15a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S1501a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1502a: the network device transmits parameters of the first DRX of the first terminal to the first terminal.
For a specific manner, see S602a.
S1503a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1504a: the second terminal sends first indication information to the first terminal.
Alternatively, the first terminal may send a request message to the second terminal, where the request message is used to obtain the first indication information. The details refer to S1304a.
S1505a: the first terminal sends first indication information to the network equipment.
The network device may determine, according to the first indication information, that the current scene is more suitable for the mode a, and generate first configuration information. The manner in which the network device obtains the first configuration information may also refer to the manner in scenario 1, which is not described herein. The network device determines that the current scenario is more suitable for the use mode a according to the first indication information, so that the network device can send a request message to the second terminal through the first terminal, and the request message is used for acquiring the first indication information.
Optionally, the first indication information may further send fourth configuration information. The content carried by the first indication information may be referred to in the above modes 1 to 6, and will not be described herein.
It should be noted that, the first indication information may be sent by the first terminal to the network device through an existing or new RRC message. For example, the first indication information may be sent by the first terminal to the network device through a first IE in UEAssistanceInformation message, sidelinkUEInformationNR message, or UEInformationResponse message. The first indication information may be located in the new IE, or the IEs in UEAssistanceInformation may be multiplexed, for example, the first indication information is UEAssistanceInformation message DRX-PREFERENCE IE, or the first indication information may be located in other IEs, which are not limited herein. The first indication information may also be transmitted through a MAC CE or UCI indicating the corresponding function or information, etc., without limitation.
Other possible ways may refer to the second terminal determining way a or the first terminal determining way a in example 7, so as to request the network device to determine the parameter of the second DRX, which is not described herein.
S1506a: and the network equipment determines parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first indication information.
In some embodiments, when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal does not have a connection with the other terminal, the network device may determine a parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information. And when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal is connected with other terminals, the network equipment can determine the parameters of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information and the parameters of the SL DRX of the other terminals. The parameter manner of specifically determining the second DRX of the second terminal may refer to manner a.
S1507a: the network device sends parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
For a specific manner, see S807a.
S1508a: the second terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
For a specific manner, see S808a.
By the method, after the first terminal and the second terminal are connected, the second terminal can be considered to be possibly connected with a plurality of first terminals, and the plurality of first terminals can not belong to the same base station, so that the second terminal can send DRX (discontinuous reception) on other SL connections to the first terminal, the base station can conveniently consider the existing SLDRX state of the second terminal when configuring the SL DRX between the current first terminal and the second terminal, the configuration of matched SL DRX parameters is facilitated, the scheduling of the base station is facilitated, and the power saving of the second terminal is facilitated.
Example 12
When the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal are configured by the network device, in this example one possible scenario 4 for determining parameters of the third DRX of the first terminal using mode B is determined by the network device based on the first indication information. Considering that determining the current scenario is more suitable for the mode a or the mode B, the method may be determined by a network device, or may be determined by a first terminal, or may be determined by a second terminal. In this example, the network device is determined as an example, and other ways may be referenced. The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 15b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1501b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
The specific manner can be seen in S901a.
S1502b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
S1503b: the second terminal sends first indication information to the first terminal.
Alternatively, the first indication information may include fourth configuration information.
S1504b: the first terminal sends first indication information to the network equipment.
The network device may determine that the current scenario is a scenario in which the network device configures parameters of SL DRX (parameters of fourth DRX) for the second terminal according to the first indication information, and determine parameters of third DRX based on the parameters of fourth DRX. Therefore, the network device may obtain the third configuration information and the first indication information after determining that the first terminal and the second terminal establish the sidestream communication connection, so as to determine, according to the third configuration information and the first indication information, a parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal. The content of the specific third configuration information may be referred to above, and will not be described herein.
Other possible ways may refer to the second terminal determining way B or the first terminal determining way B in example 8, so as to request the network device to determine the parameter of the fourth DRX and the parameter of the third DRX, which are not described herein.
S1505b: and the network equipment determines the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal according to the third configuration information and the first indication information.
In one possible implementation manner, the network device may determine the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal according to QoS information of SL traffic between the first terminal and the second terminal and parameters of SL DRX of other terminals included in the first indication information. The specific implementation process may refer to mode B, and will not be described herein.
S1506b: the network device transmits parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal to the first terminal.
S1507b: the first terminal transmits parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal to the second terminal.
S1508b: and the network equipment determines the parameter of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the second configuration information and the first indication information.
In one possible implementation, the second configuration information may include: parameters of a fourth DRX of the second terminal. Optionally, the second configuration information may further include: preference information of parameters of the third DRX. The specific manner in which the network device obtains the second configuration information may also refer to the foregoing, which is not described herein.
In some embodiments, when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal does not have a connection with another terminal, the network device may determine a parameter of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the second configuration information. And when the first indication information indicates that the second terminal is connected with other terminals, the network equipment can determine the parameter of the third DRX of the first terminal according to the second configuration information and the parameter of the SL DRX of the other terminals.
Therefore, the manner in which the network device determines the parameter of the third DRX according to the parameter of the fourth DRX of the second terminal and the first indication information may refer to the manner in which the parameter of the Uu DRX of the first terminal is determined based on the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal in the manner B, which is not described herein.
S1509b: the network device sends parameters of the third DRX to the first terminal.
See in particular S9010a.
Example 13
Considering a scenario in which the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal and the SL DRX parameters of the first terminal are configured, but there is a mismatch between Uu DRX of the first terminal and SL DRX of the second terminal, or there is a change in connection or traffic of the terminal connected to the first terminal or the terminal connected to the second terminal, resulting in inapplicability of the current SL DRX parameters of the second terminal and the SL DRX parameters of the first terminal, at this time, it may be necessary to adjust the SL DRX parameters of the first terminal. Or in the case that the SL DRX parameter configuration of the second terminal fails, the parameters of the SL DRX of the first terminal may also need to be adjusted. At this time, the second terminal or the first terminal may send adjustment information to the network device to request reconfiguration of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal. Optionally, the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal may also be reconfigured based on the adjusted parameters of the SL DRX of the first terminal. Thereby, an optimization of resource scheduling is achieved. The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 16a, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
s1601a: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1602a: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1603a: the second terminal obtains parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal.
The parameter of SL DRX of the second terminal may be the parameter of the second DRX in the above embodiment, or may be the parameter of the fourth DRX in the above embodiment, which is not limited herein. The specific manner in which the second terminal obtains the parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal may refer to the parameter of the second DRX in the foregoing embodiment or the manner in which the parameter of the fourth DRX in the foregoing embodiment is not described herein again.
S1604a: the second terminal sends first adjustment information to the first terminal.
The first adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal.
In one possible implementation, the first adjustment information may be determined by the second terminal based on the first indication information.
For example, the first indication information indicates that the parameter configuration of the SL DRX of the second terminal fails, and thus, the first adjustment information is generated accordingly.
For another example, the first indication information indicates that the second terminal has a sidelink connection with other terminals, and the first indication information also indicates parameters of SL DRX of the other terminals. Thus, the first adjustment information is generated accordingly.
Optionally, the first adjustment information may include: parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. The first adjustment information may further include: qoS information for a side-link between a first terminal and a second terminal. The first adjustment information may further include: preference information of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
It should be noted that, the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal may be a parameter of the first DRX or a parameter of the third DRX in the embodiment of the present application.
Optionally, the second terminal may further send the first indication information to the first terminal. Optionally, the first indication information may further include: fourth configuration information.
The first indication information and the first adjustment information may be sent separately or together.
The first adjustment information may be transmitted to the first terminal by the second terminal through an RRC message. The first adjustment information may be located in a new IE in the message, not limited herein. The transmission manner of the first indication information may refer to S1304a.
In another possible implementation manner, the second terminal may further send third adjustment information to the first terminal, where the third adjustment information may further be used to request the network device to adjust parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. For a specific implementation manner, reference may be made to an implementation manner of the first adjustment information.
S1605a: the first terminal obtains second adjustment information.
In one possible implementation manner, the first terminal may determine whether to request to adjust the Uu DRX parameter of the first terminal according to the first indication information sent by the second terminal and the Uu DRX parameter of the first terminal sent by the network device.
In one possible implementation manner, the first terminal may determine, according to the first adjustment information, a parameter of Uu DRX that needs to be requested to adjust the first terminal, so as to generate second adjustment information correspondingly, where the second adjustment information may include the first adjustment information, may further include a connection relationship between other second terminals connected to the first terminal, and may further include: parameters of SL DRX of other second terminals connected to the first terminal.
In another possible implementation manner, the second terminal may further obtain fourth adjustment information, where the fourth adjustment information may be used to request the network device to adjust parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. For a specific implementation manner, reference may be made to an implementation manner of the second adjustment information.
S1606a: the first terminal sends second adjustment information to the network device.
The second adjustment information is used for indicating the network equipment to adjust the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal.
Optionally, the second adjustment information may further include: parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. The second adjustment information may further include: qoS information for a side-link between a first terminal and a second terminal. The second adjustment information may further include: preference information of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
It should be noted that, the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal may be a parameter of the first DRX or a parameter of the third DRX in the embodiment of the present application.
Optionally, the first terminal may further send the first indication information to the network device. Optionally, the first indication information may further include: fourth configuration information.
The first indication information and the second adjustment information may be sent separately or together. The transmission manner of the first indication information may refer to S1505a.
The second adjustment information may be transmitted to the network device by the first terminal through an existing or new RRC message. For example, the second adjustment information may be sent by the first terminal to the network device through a first IE in UEAssistanceInformation message, sidelinkUEInformationNR message, or UEInformationResponse message. The second adjustment information may be located in the new IE, and the IEs in UEAssistanceInformation may be multiplexed, for example, the first indication information is UEAssistanceInformation message DRX-PREFERENCE IE, or the second adjustment information may be located in other IEs, which are not limited herein. The second adjustment information may also be transmitted through a MAC CE or UCI indicating the corresponding function or information, etc., without limitation.
In another possible implementation manner, the first terminal may further send fourth adjustment information to the network device, where the fourth adjustment information may be used to request the network device to adjust parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. For a specific implementation manner, reference may be made to an implementation manner of the second adjustment information.
S1607a: and the network equipment adjusts the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal according to the second adjustment information.
For example, the network device may adjust the period length of Uu DRX of the first terminal to be a multiple of the period of SL DRX according to the parameter of SL DRX of the second terminal in the second adjustment information or the parameter of SL DRX of other terminals in the second configuration information. The network device may also adjust the length of the non-start-up duration timer (INACTIVITY TIMER) for Uu DRX to be the same as the length of the non-start-up duration timer for SL DRX.
In another possible implementation manner, the network device may adjust parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal according to the fourth adjustment information. For a specific implementation manner, reference may be made to the implementation manner for adjusting the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
S1608a: and the network equipment sends the adjusted Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Optionally, the first terminal may further instruct the second terminal to reconfigure the parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the adjusted parameter of the first DRX, or the first terminal reconfigure the parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal, and send the reconfigured parameter of the second DRX to the second terminal.
In another possible implementation, the network device may send the adjusted parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal to the first terminal. Thus, the first terminal may transmit the adjusted parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal to the second terminal.
Example 14
Considering a scenario in which the SL DRX parameters of the second terminal and the SL DRX parameters of the first terminal are configured, but there is a mismatch between Uu DRX of the first terminal and SL DRX of the second terminal, or there is a change in connection or traffic of the terminal connected to the first terminal or the terminal connected to the second terminal, resulting in inapplicability of the current SL DRX parameters of the second terminal and the SL DRX parameters of the first terminal, at this time, it may be necessary to adjust the SL DRX parameters of the first terminal. Or in the case that the SL DRX parameter configuration of the second terminal fails, the parameters of the SL DRX of the first terminal may also need to be adjusted. At this time, the second terminal or the first terminal may send adjustment information to the network device to request reconfiguration of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal. Optionally, the SLDRX parameters of the second terminal may also be reconfigured based on the adjusted parameters of the SL DRX of the first terminal. Thereby, an optimization of resource scheduling is achieved. The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described by taking the communication system shown in fig. 1 and/or fig. 2 as an example. The communication method may be performed by a network device, a first terminal, and a second terminal. By way of example, the network device may be the network device 103 described in fig. 1, the first terminal may comprise the terminal 101 described in fig. 1 or a chip in the terminal 101, and the second terminal may comprise the terminal 102 or a chip in the terminal 102. As shown in fig. 16b, a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application includes:
S1601b: the network device establishes a connection with the first terminal.
For a specific way, see S601a.
S1602b: the network device sends parameters of the first DRX to the first terminal.
For a specific manner, see S602a.
S1603b: the first terminal establishes a connection with the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S603a.
S1604b: the first terminal obtains first configuration information.
For a specific manner, see S604a.
S1605b: the first terminal sends first configuration information to the second terminal.
For a specific manner, see S605a.
S1606b: and the second terminal determines parameters of a second DRX of the second terminal according to the first configuration information.
The parameter of the SL DRX of the second terminal may be the parameter of the second DRX in the above embodiment. The specific manner in which the second terminal obtains the parameters of the SL DRX of the second terminal may refer to the manner in which the parameters of the second DRX in the foregoing embodiment are not described herein.
S1607b: the second terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the first terminal.
The specific manner can be seen in S607a.
S1608b: the first terminal transmits parameters of the second DRX to the network device.
For a specific manner, see S608a.
S1609b: the second terminal sends first adjustment information to the first terminal.
The first adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal.
In one possible implementation, the first adjustment information may be determined by the second terminal based on the first indication information.
Alternatively, the first adjustment information may include first indication information. Optionally, the first indication information may further include: fourth configuration information.
For example, the first indication information indicates that the parameter configuration of the SL DRX of the second terminal fails, and thus, the first adjustment information is generated accordingly.
For another example, the first indication information indicates that the second terminal has a sidelink connection with other terminals, and the first indication information also indicates parameters of SLDRX of the other terminals. Thus, the first adjustment information is generated accordingly.
Optionally, the first adjustment information may include: parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. The first adjustment information may further include: qoS information for a side-link between a first terminal and a second terminal. The first adjustment information may further include: preference information of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
It should be noted that, the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal may be a parameter of the first DRX or a parameter of the third DRX in the embodiment of the present application.
The first indication information and the first adjustment information may be sent separately or together. The transmission method may refer to S1604a.
S1610b: the first terminal sends second adjustment information to the network device.
In one possible implementation manner, the first terminal may determine whether to request to adjust the Uu DRX parameter of the first terminal according to the first indication information sent by the second terminal and the Uu DRX parameter of the first terminal sent by the network device.
In one possible implementation manner, the first terminal may determine, according to the first adjustment information, a parameter of Uu DRX that needs to be requested to adjust the first terminal, so as to generate second adjustment information correspondingly, where the second adjustment information may include the first adjustment information, may further include a connection relationship between other second terminals connected to the first terminal, and may further include: parameters of SL DRX of other second terminals connected to the first terminal.
The second adjustment information is used for indicating the network equipment to adjust the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal.
Alternatively, the second adjustment information may include the first indication information. Optionally, the first indication information may further include: fourth configuration information.
Optionally, the second adjustment information may further include: parameters of SL DRX of the second terminal. The second adjustment information may further include: qoS information for a side-link between a first terminal and a second terminal. The second adjustment information may further include: preference information of the parameters of Uu DRX of the first terminal.
It should be noted that, the parameter of Uu DRX of the first terminal may be a parameter of the first DRX or a parameter of the third DRX in the embodiment of the present application.
The first indication information and the second adjustment information may be sent separately or together. The transmission method may refer to S1606a.
S1611b: and the network equipment adjusts the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal according to the second adjustment information.
For example, the network device may adjust the period length of Uu DRX of the first terminal to be a multiple of the period of SL DRX according to the parameter of SL DRX of the second terminal in the second adjustment information or the parameter of SL DRX of other terminals in the second configuration information. The network device may also adjust the length of the non-start-up duration timer (INACTIVITY TIMER) for Uu DRX to be the same as the length of the non-start-up duration timer for SL DRX. Reference may be made in particular to mode B.
S1612b: and the network equipment sends the adjusted Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal to the first terminal.
Optionally, the first terminal may further instruct the second terminal to reconfigure the parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal according to the adjusted parameter of the first DRX, or the first terminal reconfigure the parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal, and send the reconfigured parameter of the second DRX to the second terminal.
By the method, under the scene that the connection of the side uplink is complex, the second terminal or the first terminal can further coordinate the Uu DRX parameters of the first terminal by requesting the network equipment, so that a better coordination effect is achieved.
Referring to fig. 17, a schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application is provided. The apparatus 1700 is configured to implement the steps performed by the corresponding communication device (e.g., the first terminal, the second terminal, or the network device) in the above-described method embodiment, and as shown in fig. 17, the apparatus 1700 includes an acquisition unit 1710 and a determination unit 1720. Optionally, the apparatus 1700 further comprises a transmitting unit 1730 and/or a receiving unit 1740.
Taking the communication device as the first terminal as an example, in one possible embodiment,
An obtaining unit 1710, configured to obtain first configuration information, where the first configuration information includes: the method comprises the steps of receiving downlink control information by a first terminal and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal, wherein the parameter of the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and network equipment, and the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving the downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to the second terminal.
A sending unit 1730, configured to send the first configuration information to the second terminal, where the first configuration information is used to obtain a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal, where the parameter of the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
One possible implementation manner, the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the first configuration information.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: and based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN, wherein the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN is obtained through the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the SFN.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive first indication information from the second terminal, where the first indication information is used to indicate any one of the following: the second terminal is not connected with other terminals in a sideways way; the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a sideways way; and the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive fourth configuration information from the second terminal when there is a sidestream connection between the second terminal and other terminals; the fourth configuration information is used for indicating parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the determining unit 1720 is configured to send, according to the first indication information or the fourth configuration information, the first configuration information to the second terminal through the sending unit 1730.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send the second adjustment information to the network device; the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the parameter of the first DRX;
A receiving unit 1740 for receiving the adjusted parameters of the first DRX from the network device; and the adjusted parameter of the first DRX is determined according to the second adjustment information.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive first adjustment information from the second terminal; the first adjustment information is used for requesting adjustment of parameters of the first DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate:
and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message:
The first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the second adjustment information.
One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message:
The first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information.
Taking the communication device as the first terminal for example, in another possible embodiment,
A sending unit 1730, configured to send second configuration information to a network device, where the second configuration information includes: the second DRX parameter is used for requesting to obtain a third DRX parameter, the third DRX parameter is determined by the network equipment based on the second configuration information, and the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment;
A receiving unit 1740 for receiving parameters of the third DRX from the network device.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the third DRX is determined by the network device based on the second configuration information and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive first indication information from the second terminal, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether the second terminal has a sidelink connection with another terminal; a determining unit 1720, configured to send, according to the first indication information, the second configuration information to the network device through a sending unit 1730.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following:
the second terminal is not connected with other terminals in a sideways way;
The second terminal is connected with other terminals in a sideways way;
And the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
In one possible implementation, the sending unit 1730 sends the first indication information to the network device.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive fourth configuration information from the second terminal when there is a sidelink connection between the second terminal and another terminal, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
In one possible implementation, the sending unit 1730 sends the fourth configuration information to the network device.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message.
Taking the communication device as the first terminal for example, in another possible embodiment,
A sending unit 1730, configured to send first configuration information 1 to a network device, where the first configuration information 1 is used to request to obtain parameters of a second DRX of a second terminal, where the second DRX is used to communicate between the first terminal and the second terminal, and send the parameters of the second DRX to the second terminal.
A receiving unit 1740, configured to receive a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal from the network device, where the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to a parameter of a first DRX used for communication between the first terminal and the network device.
Taking the communication device as the first terminal for example, in another possible embodiment,
An obtaining unit 1710, configured to obtain a parameter of a first DRX, where the parameter of the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and a network device;
A determining unit 1720, configured to determine, according to the parameter of the first DRX, a parameter of a second DRX of a second terminal, where the parameter of the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal;
A transmitting unit 1730, configured to transmit the parameter of the second DRX to the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the parameter of the first DRX and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send the second adjustment information to the network device; the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the parameter of the first DRX; a receiving unit 1740 for receiving the adjusted parameters of the first DRX from the network device; and the adjusted parameter of the first DRX is determined according to the second adjustment information.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive first adjustment information from the second terminal; the first adjustment information is used for requesting adjustment of parameters of a first DRX of the first terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send fourth adjustment information to the network device; the fourth adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the parameter of the second DRX; a receiving unit 1740 for receiving the adjusted parameters of the second DRX from the network device; and the parameters of the adjusted second DRX are determined according to the fourth adjustment information.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive third adjustment information from the second terminal; the third adjustment information is used for requesting adjustment of parameters of a second DRX of the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the third adjustment information or the fourth adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, or preference information of the parameter of the second DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive first indication information from the second terminal; the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal does not establish a side uplink with other terminals; the second terminal establishes a side uplink with other terminals; and the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive fourth configuration information from the second terminal when there is a sidelink connection between the second terminal and another terminal, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
One possible implementation is that at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information or the second adjustment information; or at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information.
Taking the communication device as the second terminal as an example, in one possible embodiment,
A receiving unit 1740, configured to receive first configuration information from a first terminal, where the first configuration information includes: a first DRX parameter and a first time interval, where the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and a network device, and the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between receiving downlink control information by the first terminal and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal;
The sending unit 1730 is configured to send, to the first terminal, a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal, where the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the first configuration information, and the parameter of the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
One possible implementation manner, the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the first configuration information.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: and based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN, wherein the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN is obtained through the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the SFN.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send first indication information to the first terminal, where the first indication information is used to indicate any one of the following: the second terminal is not connected with other terminals in a sideways way; the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a sideways way; and the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
In a possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send, to the first terminal, fourth configuration information of the second terminal when there is a sidelink connection between the second terminal and another terminal, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send first adjustment information to the first terminal; the first adjustment information is used for requesting adjustment of parameters of the first DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information.
Taking the communication device as the second terminal as an example, in another possible embodiment,
The sending unit 1730 is configured to send first indication information to the first terminal, where the first indication information is used for the first terminal to send second configuration information to a network device according to the first indication information, and the second configuration information includes: and the second configuration information is used for requesting to obtain parameters of a third DRX, the parameters of the third DRX are determined by the network equipment based on the second configuration information, and the parameters of the first DRX are used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the third DRX is determined by the network device based on the second configuration information and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal is not connected with other terminals in a sideways way; the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a sideways way; and the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send, by using the first terminal, the first indication information to the network device.
In a possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send fourth configuration information to the first terminal when the second terminal has a sidelink connection with another terminal, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send, by the first terminal, the fourth configuration information to the network device.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message.
Taking the communication device as the second terminal as an example, in another possible embodiment,
A receiving unit 1740, configured to receive, by a first terminal, a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal from the network device, where the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to a parameter of a first DRX used for communication between the first terminal and the network device, and the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
Taking the communication device as the second terminal as an example, in another possible embodiment,
The receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive a parameter of a second DRX of a second terminal from the first terminal, where the parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal, and the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to a parameter of a first DRX, where the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the network device, and the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the parameter of the first DRX and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send first adjustment information to the first terminal; the first adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust parameters of the first DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send third adjustment information to the first terminal; the third adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust parameters of the second DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, or preference information of the parameter of the second DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send first indication information to the first terminal; the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal does not establish a side uplink with other terminals; the second terminal establishes a side uplink with other terminals; and the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
In a possible implementation manner, the sending unit 1730 is configured to send fourth configuration information to the first terminal when the second terminal has a sidelink connection with another terminal, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
One possible implementation is that at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information or the third adjustment information;
or at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information.
Taking the communication device as an example of a network device, in one possible embodiment,
The sending unit 1730 is configured to send, to a first terminal, a parameter of a first DRX, where the parameter of the first DRX is used for the first terminal to obtain first configuration information, and the first configuration information includes: a first DRX parameter and a first time interval, where the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and a network device, the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between receiving downlink control information by the first terminal and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal, and the first configuration information is used for obtaining a second DRX parameter of the second terminal; the parameter of the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal;
A receiving unit 1740 for receiving parameters of the second DRX from the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
A possible implementation manner, the parameters of the first DRX include: and based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN, wherein the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN is obtained through the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the SFN.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive second adjustment information from the first terminal; the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the parameter of the first DRX;
A transmitting unit 1730 configured to transmit the adjusted parameter of the first DRX to the first terminal; and the adjusted parameter of the first DRX is determined according to the second adjustment information.
A possible implementation manner, the second adjustment information is determined according to the first adjustment information from the second terminal; the first adjustment information is used for requesting adjustment of parameters of the first DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the second adjustment information.
One possible implementation is that at least one of the following is located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information.
Taking the communication device as a network device for example, in another possible embodiment,
A receiving unit 1740, configured to receive second configuration information from the first terminal, where the second configuration information includes: the second DRX parameter is used for requesting to obtain a third DRX parameter, the third DRX parameter is determined by the network equipment based on the second configuration information, and the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the network equipment;
A transmitting unit 1730, configured to transmit the parameter of the third DRX to the first terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the third DRX is determined based on the second configuration information and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal.
In one possible implementation manner, the second configuration level is determined according to first indication information from the second terminal, where the first indication information is used to indicate whether the second terminal has a sidestream connection with other terminals.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal is not connected with other terminals in a sideways way; the second terminal is connected with other terminals in a sideways way; and the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive the first indication information from the first terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive fourth configuration information from the first terminal when there is a sidelink connection between the second terminal and another terminal, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
One possible implementation manner, the fourth configuration information is obtained by the first terminal through the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the first indication information and the fourth configuration information are located in the same message.
Taking the communication device as a network device for example, in another possible embodiment,
A receiving unit 1740, configured to receive first configuration information 1 from a first terminal, where the first configuration information 1 is used for requesting to obtain parameters of a second DRX of a second terminal, where the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal;
A transmitting unit 1730, configured to transmit, to the first terminal, a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal, where the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to a parameter of a first DRX, where the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the network device.
Taking the communication device as a network device for example, in another possible embodiment,
A transmitting unit 1730 configured to transmit, to a first terminal, a parameter of a first DRX, where the parameter of the first DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and a network device;
A receiving unit 1740, configured to receive a parameter of a second DRX of the second terminal from a first terminal, where the parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal is determined according to the parameter of the first DRX, and the parameter of the second DRX is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the parameter of the second DRX is determined according to the parameter of the first DRX and a first time interval, where the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between the first terminal receiving downlink control information and sending sidestream control information to the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive second adjustment information from the first terminal, where the second adjustment information is used to request the network device to adjust a parameter of the first DRX;
A transmitting unit 1730, configured to transmit the adjusted parameter of the first DRX to the first terminal, where the adjusted parameter of the first DRX is determined according to the second adjustment information.
A possible implementation manner, the second adjustment information is determined according to first adjustment information from the second terminal, where the first adjustment information is used to request to adjust a parameter of the first DRX of the first terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive fourth adjustment information from the first terminal; the fourth adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the parameter of the second DRX;
A transmitting unit 1730 configured to transmit the adjusted parameter of the second DRX to the first terminal; and the parameters of the adjusted second DRX are determined according to the fourth adjustment information.
A possible implementation manner, the fourth adjustment information is determined according to third adjustment information from the second terminal, where the third adjustment information is used to request to adjust a parameter of the second DRX of the second terminal.
A possible implementation manner, the third adjustment information or the fourth adjustment information is further used to indicate: and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, or preference information of the parameter of the second DRX.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive, by using the first terminal, first indication information from the second terminal; the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following: the second terminal does not establish a side uplink with other terminals; the second terminal establishes a side uplink with other terminals; and the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
A possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 1740 is configured to receive, by the first terminal, fourth configuration information from the second terminal when there is a sidelink connection between the second terminal and another terminal, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
One possible implementation is that at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information or the second adjustment information; or at least two of the following are located in the same message: the first indication information, the fourth configuration information, or the first adjustment information.
With reference to any one of the foregoing possible embodiments, one possible implementation manner of the method includes that the parameter of the first DRX includes a period of the first DRX, and the parameter of the second DRX includes a period of the second DRX;
The period of the second DRX is a multiple of the period of the first DRX.
With reference to any one of the foregoing possible embodiments, one possible implementation manner of the present invention, the parameter of the first DRX includes an active period length of the first DRX, and the parameter of the second DRX includes an active period length of the second DRX;
The active period length of the second DRX is greater than or equal to the active period length of the first DRX.
With reference to any one of the foregoing possible embodiments, a possible implementation manner of the second DRX activation period is determined according to the activation period of the first DRX and at least one of the following: and the maximum value of the time intervals in the first time interval and the minimum value of the time intervals in the first time interval.
With reference to any one of the foregoing possible embodiments, a possible implementation manner of the foregoing embodiment, the start time of the second DRX is determined according to the start time of the first DRX and the first time interval.
It is to be understood that each of the above units may also be referred to as a module or a circuit, etc., and that each of the above units may be provided independently or may be fully or partially integrated.
As a possible implementation method, the transmitting unit 1730 and the receiving unit 1740 may be implemented by a transceiver unit, or the transmitting unit 1730 and the receiving unit 1740 may be collectively referred to as a transceiver unit. The transmitting unit 1730, the receiving unit 1740, or the transmitting and receiving unit may also be referred to as a communication interface.
Optionally, the communication device 1700 may further include a storage unit, where the storage unit is configured to store data or instructions (which may also be referred to as codes or programs), and the respective units may interact or be coupled with the storage unit to implement the corresponding methods or functions. For example, the acquisition unit 1710, the determination unit 1720 may read data or instructions in the storage unit, so that the communication device implements the method in the above-described embodiment.
It should be understood that the division of the units in the above apparatus is merely a division of a logic function, and may be fully or partially integrated into a physical entity or may be physically separated when actually implemented. And the units in the device can be all realized in the form of software calls through the processing element; or can be realized in hardware; it is also possible that part of the units are implemented in the form of software, which is called by the processing element, and part of the units are implemented in the form of hardware. For example, each unit may be a processing element that is set up separately, may be implemented as integrated in a certain chip of the apparatus, or may be stored in a memory in the form of a program, and the functions of the unit may be called and executed by a certain processing element of the apparatus. Furthermore, all or part of these units may be integrated together or may be implemented independently. The processing element described herein may in turn be a processor, which may be an integrated circuit with signal processing capabilities. In implementation, each step of the method or each unit above may be implemented by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor element, or may be implemented in a form of software called by the processing element.
In one example, the unit in any of the above apparatuses may be one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, for example: one or more Application SPECIFIC INTEGRATED Circuits (ASIC), or one or more microprocessors (DIGITAL SINGNAL processor, DSP), or one or more field programmable gate arrays (Field Programmable GATE ARRAY, FPGA), or a combination of at least two of these integrated Circuit forms. For another example, when the units in the apparatus may be implemented in the form of a scheduler of processing elements, the processing elements may be general-purpose processors, such as a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU) or other processor that may invoke a program. For another example, the units may be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC). The above unit for receiving (e.g., receiving unit) is an interface circuit of the apparatus for receiving signals from other apparatuses. For example, when the device is implemented in the form of a chip, the receiving unit is an interface circuit of the chip for receiving signals from other chips or devices. The above unit for transmitting (e.g., transmitting unit) is an interface circuit of the apparatus for transmitting signals to other apparatuses. For example, when the device is implemented in the form of a chip, the transmitting unit is an interface circuit of the chip for transmitting signals to other chips or devices.
Referring to fig. 18, a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application is provided. The communication device is configured to implement the operations of the first terminal, the second terminal, or the network device in the above embodiments. As shown in fig. 18, taking a communication device as an example of a first terminal or a second terminal, the communication device includes: an antenna 1810, a radio frequency device 1820, a signal processing portion 1830. The antenna 1810 is coupled to a radio frequency device 1820. In the downlink direction, the radio frequency device 1820 receives information transmitted by a network device or other terminal device through the antenna 1810, and transmits the information transmitted by the network device or other terminal device to the signal processing part 1830 for processing. In the uplink direction, the signal processing part 1830 processes information of the terminal device and transmits the processed information to the radio frequency device 1820, and the radio frequency device 1820 processes information of the terminal device and transmits the processed information to the network device or other terminal devices through the antenna 1810.
Taking a communication device as an example of a network device, the communication device includes: an antenna 1810, a radio frequency device 1820, a signal processing portion 1830. The antenna 1810 is coupled to a radio frequency device 1820. In the uplink direction, the radio frequency device 1820 receives information transmitted by the first terminal or other terminal equipment through the antenna 1810, and transmits the information transmitted by the first terminal or other terminal equipment to the signal processing part 1830 for processing. In the downlink direction, the signal processing portion 1830 processes information of the network device and sends the processed information to the radio frequency device 1820, and the radio frequency device 1820 processes information of the network device and sends the processed information to the first terminal or other terminal devices through the antenna 1810.
The signal processing section 1830 is used to realize processing of each communication protocol layer of data. The signal processing portion 1830 may be one subsystem of the communication device, and the communication device may then also include other subsystems, such as a central processing subsystem, for implementing processing of the communication device operating system and application layers; for another example, the peripheral subsystem may be used to implement connections with other devices. The signal processing section 1830 may be a separately provided chip. Alternatively, the above apparatus may be located in the signal processing section 1830.
The signal processing portion 1830 may include one or more processing elements 1831, including, for example, a host CPU and other integrated circuits, and interface circuitry 1833. In addition, the signal processing portion 1830 may also include a memory element 1832. The storage element 1832 is configured to store data and a program, and the program for executing the method executed by the communication apparatus in the above method may or may not be stored in the storage element 1832, for example, in a memory other than the signal processing section 1830, and the signal processing section 1830 loads the program into a cache for use in use. The interface circuit 1833 is used to communicate with the device. The above means may be located in a signal processing section 1830, which signal processing section 1830 may be implemented by a chip comprising at least one processing element for performing the steps of any of the methods performed by the above communication device and interface circuitry for communicating with other means. In one implementation, the units implementing the steps in the above method may be implemented in the form of a processing element scheduler, for example, the apparatus includes a processing element and a storage element, and the processing element invokes the program stored in the storage element to perform the method performed by the communication device in the above method embodiment. The memory element may be a memory element where the processing element is on the same chip, i.e. an on-chip memory element.
In another implementation, the program for performing the method performed by the communication device in the above method may be a storage element on a different chip than the processing element, i.e. an off-chip storage element. At this time, the processing element calls or loads a program from the off-chip storage element on the on-chip storage element to call and execute the method executed by the communication device (first terminal, second terminal, or network device) in the above method embodiment.
In yet another implementation, the units of the communication device implementing the steps of the above method may be configured as one or more processing elements, which are disposed on the signal processing portion 1830, where the processing elements may be integrated circuits, for example: one or more ASICs, or one or more DSPs, or one or more FPGAs, or a combination of these types of integrated circuits. These integrated circuits may be integrated together to form a chip.
The units implementing the steps in the above method may be integrated together and implemented in the form of a system-on-a-chip (SOC) chip for implementing the above method. At least one processing element and a storage element can be integrated in the chip, and the processing element invokes the stored program of the storage element to implement the method executed by the communication device; or at least one integrated circuit may be integrated within the chip for implementing the method performed by the above communication device; or may be combined with the above implementation, the functions of part of the units are implemented in the form of processing element calling programs, and the functions of part of the units are implemented in the form of integrated circuits.
It will be seen that the above apparatus may comprise at least one processing element and interface circuitry, wherein the at least one processing element is adapted to perform a method performed by any of the communication devices provided by the above method embodiments. The processing element may be configured in a first manner: that is, a part or all of the steps executed by the communication device are executed in a manner of calling the program stored in the storage element; the second way is also possible: i.e. by means of integrated logic circuitry of hardware in the processor element in combination with instructions to perform some or all of the steps performed by the communication device; of course, some or all of the steps performed by the communication device may also be performed in combination with the first and second modes.
The processing element herein, as described above, may be a general purpose processor, such as a CPU, or one or more integrated circuits configured to implement the above methods, such as: one or more ASICs, or one or more microprocessor DSPs, or one or more FPGAs, etc., or a combination of at least two of these integrated circuit forms. The memory element may be one memory or may be a collective term for a plurality of memory elements.
Example 1
As shown in fig. 19, a communication method provided by the present application includes the following steps:
When the SL DRX parameters of the Rx UE are configured by the Rx UE itself, the SL DRX of the Rx UE is aligned to Uu DRX of the Tx UE by the Rx UE.
S1900. the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE within the coverage of the base station to which it is connected.
S1901.Tx UE establishes connection with Rx UE.
S1902.tx UE sends SL traffic qos+uudrx+gap to Rx UE.
The specific forms of Uu DRX and gap are as follows:
The Uu DRX indicated information includes Uu DRX parameters configured by the base station for the Tx UE through RRC messages. For example, the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE through the DRX-config IE in RRCReconfiguration message. At least parameters onduration timer, longcycle, startoffset, slotoffset, INACTIVITY TIMER and the like in all DRX parameters are included, and the specific forms are as follows:
a) The Tx UE transmits Uu DRX-config parameters configured by the base station and offset (granularity is slot) between the SFN and the DFN, namely the SFN is calculated by the Rx UE according to the Uu DRX-config parameters transmitted by the Tx UE by default, and the SFN is converted into the DFN by the Rx UE according to slot offset between the SFN and the DFN transmitted by the Tx UE; the formulas for calculating SFN and subframe are as follows, and DRX-ShortCycle/DRX-LongCycle and DRX-StartOffset are known parameters:
When a short period is used: [ (sfn×10) +subframe number ] module (DRX-ShortCycle) = (DRX-StartOffset) module (DRX-ShortCycle);
When long periods are used: [ (sfn×10) +subframe number ] module (DRX-LongCycle) =drx-StartOffset;
assuming that the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN sent by the Tx UE is n slots, the Rx UE offsets the SFN by n slots to obtain the DFN and the subframe in the DFN.
For example, when sfn=29, subframe=8, and n=15 are calculated according to the above formula, the specific DFN and subframe in DFN should be: dfn=30, subframe=5;
b) The Tx UE converts the Uu DRX parameter into a DRX-config parameter capable of obtaining the DFN, and then sends the Uu DRX-config parameter to the Rx UE; the specific calculation flow of the Tx UE before sending the parameters is briefly described as follows:
The Tx UE calculates SFN and subframe according to the above formula, and since the modulo operation can obtain a series of periodic SFN and subframe results, the first result with the smallest number is mainly taken here. And deducing the DFN, subframe and slot according to the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN, bringing the DFN and subframe into the formula, and calculating a new DRX-StartOffset-new. And finally, the Tx UE updates the DRX-StartOffset in the original Uu DRX-config to be DRX-StartOffset-new.
It should be noted that, whether the Tx UE in a) directly sends the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN to the Rx UE for calculation, or the Tx UE in b) calculates and then sends the slot offset to the Rx UE, the Tx UE may obtain the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN in a manner of broadcasting by the base station, reconfiguration by the base station, pre-configuring by the UE, and so on.
The gap values may be the maximum value gap_max and/or the minimum value gap_min in a gap table (including 8 values in total) configured by the base station for the Tx UE through RRC messages, which may be named as "sl-DCI-ToSL-Trans" in the current protocol, or the values calculated through both gap_max and gap_min. The way in which the Tx UE sends the gap is as follows:
if Uu DRX onduration>gap_max(or gap_max<Uu DRX onduration+gap_min)
Tx UE sends gap_max and gap_min;
else
Tx UE sends gap_max or gap_min;
It should be noted that, the Tx UE may send the above related information to the Rx UE through RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
S1903. the rx UE refers to "SL traffic qos+uudrx+gap" transmitted by the Tx UE, and determines a SL DRX configuration aligned with uudrx of the Tx UE.
The manner in which the Rx UE determines SL DRX is largely dependent on the UE implementation, some possible determinations are as follows:
After the Rx UE obtains Uu DRX of the Tx UE in DFN form in the manner a or the manner b of S1902, the Rx UE determines the period of SL DRX to be the same as or a multiple of Uu DRX, that is, determines the length of longcycle/shortcycle of SL DRX; the Rx UE sets the SL DRX-INACTIVITY TIMER length as long as Uu DRX of the Tx UE; the Rx UE determines the start time of the SL DRX cycle with reference to the formula TDL-TTAmax/2+ksl Tslot, where the Rx UE mainly considers TTAmax, the maximum value of the time alignment, since the time alignment of Uu ports is an amount that changes with time and UE movement.
In addition to the above parameters, the Rx UE may also determine SL DRX onduration based on gap, for example:
if Tx UE transmits gap_max and gap_min
Gap_max+ Uu DRX onduration start determines SL DRX onduration start;
gap_min+ Uu DRX onduration end determines SL DRX onduration end;
elseif Tx UE transmits gap_max or gap_min
Gap_max/gap_min+ Uu DRX onduration START AND END determination SL DRX onduration START AND END
Or the Rx UE directly sets onduration timer to be the same as Uu DRX.
One possible Uu DRX aligned SL DRX is shown in fig. 5a to 5 d.
S1904.Rx UE sends SL DRX configuration to Tx UE.
S1905.tx UE reports SL DRX configuration to the gNB.
Aiming at the condition that the Rx UE configures the SL DRX parameter thereof, after the Tx UE establishes connection with the Rx UE, the Rx UE configures the SL DRX based on the Uu DRX of the Tx UE, and the Rx UE aligns the SL DRX to the Uu DRX of the Tx UE, thereby being convenient for the resource scheduling of mode1 and avoiding the incapability of scheduling or resource waste caused by mismatching of the SL DRX and the Uu DRX. The Tx UE transmits Uu DRX parameters and gaps between DCI-SCIs to the Rx UE.
Example two
When the SL DRX parameter of the Rx UE is configured by the Rx UE, according to the connection condition of the Tx UE and the Rx UE, under the condition of one-to-one or one-to-many between the Tx UE and the Rx UE, the SL DRX is configured by the Rx UE based on Uu DRX, and the SL DRX is aligned to Uu DRX; in case of many-to-one between Tx UE and Rx UE, the base station is responsible for coordinating alignment Uu DRX and SL DRX, aligning Uu DRX to SL DRX. First, the connection between Tx UE and Rx UE is divided into the following three cases for analysis discussion:
Case1: one-to-many between Tx UE and Rx UE, configuring SL DRX by Rx UE based on Uu DRX, and aligning SL DRX to Uu DRX; as shown in fig. 12e, multiple Rx UEs respectively transmit their configured SL DRX to Tx UEs, and as shown in fig. 12f, a possible Rx UE configuration is a DRX pattern after consideration of coordination alignment.
In Case1, if the base station is responsible for coordination, the time for the Tx UE to wake up may be increased, causing excessive power consumption of the Tx UE, or the base station may not find Uu DRX of an align for the Tx UE due to excessive period differences of multiple Rx UEs.
Case2: many-to-one between Tx UE and Rx UE, the base station is responsible for coordinating and aligning Uu DRX and SL DRX, and aligning Uu DRX to SL DRX. As shown in (a) of fig. 20, the Rx UE transmits its configured SL DRX to multiple Tx UEs, respectively, and as shown in (a) of fig. 20, a possible base station is responsible for coordinating DRX pattern after Uu DRX and SL DRX.
In Case2, if the Rx UE is responsible for coordination, the time for waking up the Rx UE may be increased, resulting in excessive power consumption of the Rx UE, as shown in fig. 12g, the Rx UE configures only one set of SL DRX parameters for multiple Tx UEs connected, and the Rx UE wakes up to receive data according to the set of SL DRX parameters; whereas in fig. 12f the Rx UE configures a set of SL DRX parameters for each Tx UE of the connected multiple Tx UEs, the Rx UE wakes up at the activation time corresponding to each set of SL DRX parameters. Thus, both cases as in fig. 12g and fig. 12f may cause Rx UEs to wake up too long. Or the Rx UE cannot find a coordinated SL DRX (as in (b) of fig. 20) due to the excessive difference in the periods of the multiple Tx UEs.
Case3: as shown in fig. 12i, the Tx UE and the Rx UE are many-to-many, if a new Rx UE is added to an aligned stable connection, the Rx UE is responsible for coordination alignment, and if a new Tx UE is added to an aligned stable connection, the base station is responsible for coordination alignment.
In order to get knowledge of which of multiple cases is currently in after the Tx UE and the Rx UE establish a connection, related information can be exchanged between the Rx UE and the Tx UE, and the scheme of the second embodiment is illustrated below.
As shown in fig. 21, a communication method provided by the present application includes the following steps:
s2100. the Tx UE is in the coverage area of the base station to which it is connected, and the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE;
s2101, establishing connection between Tx UE and Rx UE;
s2102. the Rx UE sends a first indication information to the Tx UE informing the Tx UE of the "SL connected" state of the Rx UE after the Tx UE establishes a connection with the current Tx UE, for example:
1bit indicates that the Rx UE is the receiving end: one-to-one (or no SL connection between other Tx UEs), or many-to-one (or there are also SL connections with other Tx UEs), etc.
The Rx UE sends first indication information with a value of true to indicate that other SL connections exist in the Rx UE, and the Rx UE does not send the first indication information with the value of true to indicate that other SL connections do not exist in the Rx UE;
The Rx UE sends first indication information with the value of true/false to indicate that other SL connection exists in the Rx UE, and the Rx UE reports the first indication information with the value of false/true to indicate that other SL connection does not exist in the Rx UE;
The Rx UE sends first indication information with the value of 0/1, which indicates that the Rx UE has other SL connection, and the Rx UE reports the first indication information with the value of 1/0, which indicates that the Rx UE does not have other SL connection;
It should be noted that, the Rx UE may send the first indication information while successfully establishing the SL connection with the Tx UE in S2101, where the first indication information is sent through a connection establishment completion message; the Rx UE may also transmit the first indication information after completion of S2101, when the first indication is transmitted through RRCReconfigurationSidelink message.
S2103. the tx UE receives the first indication information, determines which of the cases of the present embodiment is currently in, and decides whether the base station or the Rx UE is responsible for coordination alignment.
Specifically, the Tx UE determines which of the cases currently exists in this embodiment mainly by the following method:
the Tx UE acquires that the Rx UE is currently connected with one or more other Tx UEs according to the first indication information;
the Tx UE itself judges that it is connected to one or more other Rx UEs;
If the first indication information indicates that the Rx UE is connected with only one Tx UE currently, and the Tx UE is connected with only one Rx UE, the connection state of the Tx UE is one-to-one;
If the first indication information indicates that the Rx UE is currently connected to only one Tx UE and the Tx UE itself is connected to a plurality of Rx UEs, the current Tx UE is connected in a one-to-many (Case 1) state;
If the first indication information indicates that the Rx UE is currently connected with a plurality of other Tx UEs and the Tx UE is connected with only one Rx UE, the connection state of the current Tx UE is many-to-one (Case 2);
If the first indication information indicates that the Rx UE is currently connected to only a plurality of other Tx UEs and the Tx UE itself is connected to a plurality of Rx UEs, the connection state of the current Tx UE is a many-to-many (Case 3);
Since the Tx UE determines different cases based on the received information in S2103, it is decided that the base station or the Rx UE is responsible for coordinating Uu DRX and SL DRX. The present embodiment gives different subsequent steps based on different decisions of the Tx UE in S2103.
When the Tx UE decides that the base station is responsible for coordinating the alignment of Uu DRX and SL DRX, the following steps are performed:
S2104. the tx UE sends a SL traffic QoS to the Rx UE, where the SL traffic QoS is used to assist the Rx UE in configuring SL DRX;
S2105, the Rx UE refers to SL service QoS sent by the Tx UE to determine SL DRX parameters;
s2106, the Rx UE transmits SL DRX parameters to the Tx UE;
s2107. the tx UE reports SL traffic qos+sl DRX parameters+the first request information to the gNB.
The first request information is used for the Tx UE to request the base station to align Uu DRX and SL DRX parameters, request to reconfigure Uu DRX or report one or more of Uu DRX patterns of its preference, etc.
Specific form of first request information:
When the first request information is used for the Tx UE to request alignment of Uu DRX and SL DRX parameters/request reconfiguration of Uu DRX from the base station, the first request information may be a 1bit indication, for example:
The Tx UE sends first request information with a value of true to indicate that the Tx UE requests alignment/reconfiguration, and the Tx UE does not send the first request information with the value of true to indicate that the Tx UE does not request alignment/reconfiguration;
the Tx UE reports first request information with the value of true/false, which indicates that the Tx UE requests alignment/reconfiguration, and the Tx UE reports first request information with the value of false/true, which indicates that the Tx UE does not request alignment/reconfiguration;
The Tx UE reports first request information with the value of 1/0, which indicates that the Tx UE requests alignment/reconfiguration, and the Tx UE reports first request information with the value of 0/1, which indicates that the Tx UE does not request alignment/reconfiguration;
when the first request information is used for the Tx UE to report its preferred Uu DRX pattern to the base station, the first request information may be a specific DRX parameter, such as the related timer described above. It should be noted that, at this time, the Tx UE may send the first request information using the new IE in the first message, or the Tx UE may multiplex the existing IE "DRX-reference" in the existing UEAssistanceInformation;
The UE sends the first request information through a first message, wherein the first request information is an IE in the first message, and the first message can be at least one of RRC messages sent to the base station by the UE, such as SidelinkUEInformationNR, UEAssistanceInformation, UECapabilityInformation or UEInformationResponse;
The first information may be an optional IE or an mandatory IE in the first message;
The three messages Tx UE in S2107 may be transmitted together and separately.
S2108, the base station reconfigures the Uu DRX parameters of the Tx UE, for example, adjusts the Uu DRX period length to be SL DRX multiple, the Uu and SL INACTIVITY TIMER lengths are identical, and the like.
S2109, the base station transmits the Uu DRX parameters of the Tx UE after reconfiguration.
As shown in fig. 22, a communication method provided by the present application includes the following steps:
S2200, the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE in the coverage area of the base station connected with the Tx UE;
S2201, establishing connection between Tx UE and Rx UE;
s2202.Rx UE sends first indication information to Tx UE, and informs the "SL connection" state of Rx UE after the Tx UE establishes connection with the current Tx UE.
S2103. the tx UE receives the first indication information, determines which of the cases of the present embodiment is currently in, and decides whether the base station or the Rx UE is responsible for coordination alignment.
When the Tx UE decides that the Rx UE is responsible for co-ordinating the alignment Uu DRX and SL DRX, performing:
s2204, executing S1902 in the first embodiment;
s2205. S1903 in embodiment one is performed;
s2206. execute S1904 in embodiment one;
s2207. S1905 in embodiment one is performed;
aiming at the condition that the Rx UE configures the SL DRX parameter thereof, after the Tx UE establishes connection with the Rx UE, the Rx UE informs the Tx UE of the SL connection state thereof, so that the Tx UE can conveniently judge whether the Tx UE is in charge of coordination alignment or not under various cases, and the base station or the Rx UE is particularly responsible for. The base station re-configures Uu DRX based on the first request information of the Tx UE, aligns Uu DRX to SL DRX or the Rx UE configures SL DRX parameters based on Uu DRX of the Tx UE, and the Rx UE aligns SL DRX to Uu DRX of the Tx UE, so that resource scheduling of mode1 is facilitated, and incapability of scheduling or resource waste caused by mismatching of SL DRX and Uu DRX is avoided.
The improvement of the second embodiment compared with the prior art is as follows: the Rx UE informs the Tx UE of the SL connection state of the Tx UE, so that the Tx UE can know the connection condition of the current Rx UE. The Tx UE judges that a base station or an Rx UE is responsible for coordination alignment Uu DRX and SL DRX based on the current connection condition, if the Tx UE judges that the base station is responsible for coordination alignment, the Tx UE needs to report first request information to the base station; if the Tx UE determines that the Rx UE is responsible for coordination alignment, the Tx UE needs to send Uu DRX parameter +gap to the Rx UE. The improvement of the second embodiment compared with the first embodiment is that: the first embodiment is a more general scheme and the Rx UE is responsible for coordinating the simplicity of the scheme when determining its SL DRX parameters by itself. The second embodiment further comprehensively considers some possible complex scenes, and the scheme is more complex than the first embodiment, but can achieve better coordination effect for different scenes. The second embodiment is thus different from the first embodiment in that the Rx UE should inform the Tx UE of its SL connection status, so that the Tx UE decides which party of the base station or the Rx UE is responsible for coordination alignment.
Example III
When the SL DRX parameters of the Rx UE are configured by the Rx UE itself, the Rx UE is responsible for coordinating Uu DRX of the Tx UE with SL DRX of the Rx UE first, and if the Rx UE cannot coordinate more aligned SL DRX, the Rx UE may notify the Tx UE and request the base station to reconfigure Uu DRX parameters by the Tx UE.
As shown in fig. 23, a communication method provided by the present application includes the following steps:
S2300. The Tx UE is in the coverage area of the base station connected with the Tx UE, and the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE;
s2301. The Tx UE establishes a connection with the Rx UE;
s2302. the tx UE transmits the SL traffic qos+uu DRX parameter+gap to the Rx UE, wherein the specific form of Uu DRX parameter and gap refers to S1902 of embodiment one.
S2303.Rx UE determines a SL DRX parameter configuration aligned with Uu DRX of Tx UE with reference to "SL traffic QoS+uu DRX parameter+gap" sent by Tx UE; the manner in which the Rx UE determines the SL DRX parameters is mainly referred to S1903 of embodiment one.
S2304.Rx UE sends configured SL DRX parameters to Tx UE;
S2305, optionally, the Rx UE sends second indication information to the Tx UE, where the second indication information is used for the Rx UE to notify the Tx UE that "at least one of the Rx UE has other SL connections, the Rx UE requests the Tx UE to coordinate Uu DRX, or the Rx UE cannot be aligned" and so on, where the second indication information may be indicated in several ways, for example:
The Rx UE sends second indication information with a value true to indicate that the Rx UE has at least one of other SL connection, the Rx UE requests the Tx UE to coordinate Uu DRX, or the Rx UE cannot be aligned, and the Rx UE does not send the second indication information with the value true to indicate that the Rx UE does not have at least one of other SL connection, the Rx UE does not request the Tx UE to coordinate Uu DRX, or the Rx UE can be aligned;
The Rx UE sends second indication information with the value of true/false, which indicates that the Rx UE has other SL connection, the Rx UE requests the Tx UE to coordinate Uu DRX, the Rx UE cannot align, and the Rx UE sends second indication information with the value of false/true, which indicates that the Rx UE does not have other SL connection, the Rx UE does not request the Tx UE to coordinate Uu DRX, and the Rx UE can align;
The Rx UE sends second indication information with the value of 0/1, which indicates that the Rx UE has other SL connection, the Rx UE requests the Tx UE to coordinate Uu DRX, the Rx UE cannot be aligned, and the Rx UE sends second indication information with the value of 1/0, which indicates that the Rx UE does not have other SL connection, the Rx UE does not request the Tx UE to coordinate Uu DRX, and the Rx UE can be aligned;
s2306. the tx UE reports SL traffic qos+sl DRX parameters+the first request information to the gNB.
The first request information is used for the Tx UE to request the base station to align Uu DRX and SL DRX, request to reconfigure Uu DRX, or report at least one of Uu DRX patterns of its preference, etc. (the same as S2107 when the base station is responsible for coordination in embodiment two).
S2307, the base station reconfigures Uu DRX parameters.
S2408, the base station sends the reconfigured Uu DRX parameters to the TX UE.
Aiming at the condition that the Rx UE configures the SL DRX parameter thereof, after the Tx UE establishes connection with the Rx UE, the Tx UE directly transmits the Uu DRX parameter to the Rx UE, so that the Rx UE can align the SL DRX to the Uu DRX. Meanwhile, if the Rx UE cannot coordinate a better result, the Rx UE sends a request to the Tx UE again to reconfigure the Uu DRX parameter, so that the resource scheduling of mode1 is facilitated, and the incapability of scheduling or resource waste caused by mismatching of SL DRX and Uu DRX is avoided.
The improvement of the third embodiment compared with the prior art is that: the Tx UE directly transmits Uu DRX parameters to the Rx UE, so that the Rx UE can be aligned to Uu DRX when SL DRX is configured; when the Rx UE cannot coordinate the SL DRX which is matched with the comparison, the Rx UE sends second indication information to the Tx UE to request the Tx UE to reconfigure Uu DRX parameters; the Tx UE transmits the first request information to the base station after receiving the request of the Rx UE. The improvement compared with the first embodiment is that: in the first embodiment, only when the Rx UE configures its SL DRX parameters, the Rx UE is responsible for coordination alignment, which is a more general scheme, but in the scenario that the connection on the sidelink is more complex, there are cases that some Rx UEs cannot coordinate to obtain a better result, so in the third embodiment, on the basis of the first embodiment, the Rx UE can further coordinate Uu DRX through a request, thereby achieving a better coordination effect. The improvement compared with the embodiment is that: in the second embodiment, the coordinator is mainly determined by the Tx UE, and the Tx UE itself needs the information provided by the Rx UE to determine the current specific Case, and for the Tx UE, multiple cases determine the complexity added by the coordinator. In the third embodiment, the Tx UE directly sends its Uu DRX parameter, and requests to the base station to coordinate the Uu DRX parameter based on the request of the Rx UE, and if the Rx UE can directly configure a more matched SL DRX parameter based on the Uu DRX parameter sent by the Tx UE, complexity is reduced.
Example IV
The preconditions and core ideas of the fourth embodiment are: when the SL DRX parameter of the Rx UE is configured by the base station, the base station coordinates alignment of Tx UE Uu DRX and Rx UE SL DRX. The fourth embodiment mainly describes two schemes: 1. rx UE interacts with Tx UE itself with other Tx UE connection case (S2102 similar to embodiment two); 2. the Rx UE only sends SL DRX parameters on SL connections with other Tx UEs to the Tx UE.
As shown in fig. 24, in order to provide a communication method according to the present application, an Rx UE interacts with a Tx UE to connect itself with other Tx UEs, and includes the following steps:
Rx UE interacts with Tx UE itself with other Tx UE connection case (S2002 similar to embodiment two):
S2400.Tx UE is in the coverage area of the base station connected with the Tx UE, and the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE;
s2401, establishing connection between Tx UE and Rx UE;
S2402, the Rx UE sends first indication information to the Tx UE to inform the 'SL connection' state of the Rx UE after the Tx UE establishes connection with the current Tx UE. The specific content is the same as S2102 of the second embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, this step is an optional or necessary step. Based on the different contents indicated by the first indication information, S2103 is divided into two cases, S2403a is performed if the first indication information indicates that the Rx UE has no other SL connection, and S2403b is performed otherwise. And then sequentially performs S2404.
It should be added that, before the Rx UE sends the first indication information in S2402, the Tx UE may send a first query message to the Rx UE, where the message may be used for the Tx UE to query whether the Rx UE has other SL connections or for the Tx UE to query whether the Rx UE has other SL DRX parameters;
S2403a.tx UE reports SL traffic QoS to the base station.
S2403b.1.rx UE sends other SL DRX parameters for SL connections to Tx UE.
The Rx UE may send multiple sets of SL DRX parameters directly, the specific parameters being the same as described above.
For Rx UE to send SL DRX parameters, there are several possibilities: the Rx UE directly transmits the DFN-related SL DRX parameter, or directly transmits the SFN-related SL DRX parameter after the Rx UE transitions, or the Rx UE transmits the DFN-related SL DRX parameter and the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN, etc.
S2403b.2.tx UE reports SL DRX parameters of other SL connections s sent by Rx UE to the base station;
S2404, the base station coordinates alignment, namely, the Uu DRX parameter is reconfigured and the SL DRX parameter is configured, for example, the Uu DRX period length is adjusted to be SL DRX multiple, the Uu and SL INACTIVITY TIMER lengths are the same, and the like; if the Uu DRX parameters of the Tx UE in S2400 are more matched with the SL DRX parameters configured by the base station in this step, the base station may not reconfigure Uu DRX parameters, mainly depending on the base station implementation.
S2405, the base station sends SL DRX parameters and reconfigured Uu DRX parameters to the Tx UE.
S2406.tx UE forwards SL DRX parameters to Rx UE.
As shown in fig. 25, in order to provide a communication method according to the present application, an Rx UE only transmits SL DRX parameters on SL connections with other Tx UEs to a Tx UE, including the steps of:
S2500. the Tx UE is within the coverage area of the base station to which it is connected, and the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE;
s2501, a Tx UE establishes connection with an Rx UE;
Based on the different cases where the Rx UE itself judges whether other Tx UEs are connected, S2502 is divided into two cases, S2502a is performed if the Rx UE itself is not connected to other Tx UEs, otherwise S2502b is performed. And then sequentially execute S2503.
S2502a. Tx UE reports SL traffic QoS to base station;
s2502b.1.rx UE sends other SL DRX parameters for SL connections to Tx UE;
the Rx UE may directly send multiple sets of SL DRX, with the specific parameters being the same as described above;
For Rx UE to send SL DRX, there are several possibilities: the Rx UE directly transmits the SL DRX parameter related to the DFN, or directly transmits the SL DRX parameter related to the SFN after the Rx UE is converted, or the Rx UE transmits the SL DRX parameter related to the DFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the DFN.
S2502b.2. the tx UE reports SL service QoS and SL DRX parameters of other SL connections sent by the Rx UE to the base station;
it is to be added that before S2502, the Tx UE may send a first inquiry message to the Rx UE, which message may be used for the Tx UE to inquire whether the Rx UE has other SL connections or for the Tx UE to inquire whether the Rx UE has other SL DRX parameters;
s2503, the base station coordinates alignment, namely, the Uu DRX is reconfigured and the SL DRX is configured, for example, the Uu DRX period length is adjusted to be a SL DRX multiple, the Uu and SL INACTIVITY TIMER lengths are the same, and the like; if Uu DRX of the Tx UE in S2500 is better matched with SLDRX configured by the base station in S, the base station may not reconfigure Uu DRX, mainly depending on the base station implementation.
S2504, the base station transmits SLDRX parameters and reconfigured Uu DRX parameters to the Tx UE;
s2505.tx UE forwards SL DRX parameters to Rx UE.
Aiming at the situation that the base station configures SL DRX parameters of Rx UE, after the Tx UE and the Rx UE are connected, the situation that the Rx UE is possibly connected with a plurality of Tx UEs and the Tx UEs possibly do not belong to the same base station is considered, so that the Rx UE can send other SL connection DRX parameters to the Tx UE, the base station can conveniently consider the existing SL DRX state of the Rx UE when configuring the SL DRX parameters between the current Tx UE and the Rx UE, the configuration of the aligned SL DRX parameters is facilitated, the scheduling of the base station is facilitated, and the power saving of the Rx UE is facilitated. Embodiment four differs from the improvements of the prior art in that: the Rx UE sends SL DRX parameters on other SL connections to the Tx UE, while the Tx UE reports the relevant information to the base station. Optionally, the Rx UE may also inform the Tx UE of its SL DRX connection status before.
Example five
When the SLDRX parameters of the Rx UE are configured by the Tx UE, the Tx UE Uu DRX and the Rx UE SL DRX are aligned by the base station and/or the Tx UE. This embodiment mainly describes two schemes: 1. rx UE interacts with Tx UE itself with other Tx UE connection case (S2102 similar to embodiment two); 2. the Rx UE only sends SL DRX parameters on SL connections with other Tx UEs to the Tx UE.
As shown in fig. 26, for a communication method provided by the present application, the Rx UE interacts with the Tx UE to connect itself with other Tx UEs (similar to S2102 of the second embodiment), and includes the following steps:
S2600.Tx UE is in the coverage area of the base station connected with the Tx UE, and the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE;
s2601, establishing connection between Tx UE and Rx UE;
S2602, the Rx UE sends first indication information to the Tx UE, and informs the 'SL connection' state of the Rx UE after the Tx UE establishes connection with the current Tx UE. The specific content is identical to S2602 of the second embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, this step is an optional or necessary step. Based on the different contents indicated by the first indication information, S2603 is divided into two cases, S2603a is performed if the first indication information indicates that the Rx UE has no other SL connection, and S2603b is performed otherwise.
It should be added that, before the Rx UE sends the first indication information in S2602, the Tx UE may send a first query message to the Rx UE, where the message may be used for the Tx UE to query whether the Rx UE has other SL connections or for the Tx UE to query whether the Rx UE has other SL DRX parameters;
Case 1:
s2603a. Tx UE configures SL DRX parameters between the two for Rx UE with respect to alignment;
Case 2:
S2603b.1.rx UE sends SL DRX parameters of other SL connections to Tx UE;
The Rx UE may send multiple sets SLDRX of parameters directly, with the specific parameters being the same as described above;
for Rx UE to send SLDRX parameters, there are several possibilities: the Rx UE directly transmits the DFN-related SL DRX parameters, or the Rx UE directly transmits the SFN-related SL DRX parameters after conversion, or the Rx UE transmits the DFN-related SLDRX parameters and the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN.
S2603b.2.Tx UE configures SL DRX parameters between the two currently for Rx UE considering alignment;
S2604.tx UE sends its configured SL DRX parameters between the base station and the Rx UE currently; if the Tx UE cannot configure an aligned SL DRX parameter, the Tx UE may send first request information to the base station, where the content of the first request information is consistent with the foregoing embodiments.
S2605, the base station reconfigures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE.
As shown in fig. 27, for a communication method provided by the present application, an Rx UE only transmits SL DRX parameters on SL connections with other Tx UEs to a Tx UE, including the steps of:
S2700.Tx UE is in the coverage area of the base station connected with the Tx UE, and the base station configures Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE;
S2701. The Tx UE establishes connection with the Rx UE;
Based on the different cases where the Rx UE itself judges whether other Tx UEs are connected, S2702 is divided into two cases, and if the Rx UE itself is not connected to other Tx UEs, S2702a is performed, otherwise S2702b is performed.
Case 1:
S2702a. Tx UE configures SL DRX parameters between the two for Rx UE with consideration of alignment;
S2703. The Tx UE sends SL DRX parameters between the base station and the Rx UE configured by the Tx UE;
Case 2:
s2702b.1.Rx UE sends other SL DRX parameters for SL connection to Tx UE;
the Rx UE may directly send multiple sets of SL DRX parameters, with the specific parameters being the same as described above;
For Rx UE to send SL DRX parameters, there are several possibilities: the Rx UE directly transmits the DFN-related SL DRX parameters, or the Rx UE directly transmits the SFN-related SL DRX parameters after conversion, or the Rx UE transmits the DFN-related SLDRX parameters and the slot offset between the SFN and the DFN.
S2702b.2.Tx UE configures SL DRX parameters between the two currently for Rx UE considering alignment;
S2703.tx UE sends SL DRX between its configured current two to base station and Rx UE; if the Tx UE cannot configure one of the aligned SL DRX, the Tx UE may send the first request information to the base station, where the content of the first request information is consistent with the foregoing embodiments.
S2704, the base station reallocates Uu DRX parameters for the Tx UE;
For the situation that the Tx UE configures SL DRX parameters of the Rx UE, after the Tx UE and the Rx UE are connected, the Rx UE can send other SL DRX parameters to the Tx UE in consideration of the fact that the Rx UE is possibly connected with a plurality of Tx UEs, and meanwhile the Tx UE can request the base station to reconfigure Uu DRX parameters, so that the configuration of the aligned SL DRX parameters is beneficial to the scheduling of the base station and the power saving of the Rx UE.
The fifth embodiment differs from the improvement of the prior art in that: the Rx UE sends SL DRX parameters on other SL connections to the Tx UE, which sends the first request information to the base station. Optionally, the Rx UE may also inform the Tx UE of its SL DRX connection status before.
The Tx UE transmits Uu DRX parameters+gap to the Rx UE, so that the Rx UE coordinates the DRX parameters; the Rx UE sends the current SL connection state to the Tx UE to inform the Tx UE whether other SL connection exists currently or not; the Tx UE reports "first request information" to the gNB for the Tx UE to request the base station to align at least one of the Uu DRX parameters and the SL DRX parameters, request to reconfigure the Uu DRX parameters, report its preferred Uu DRX pattern, etc. The Rx UE sends SL DRX on other SL connection, and the Tx UE reports SL service QoS+other SL DRX parameters to the gNB. The Tx UE sends Uu DRX parameter+gap to the Rx UE: a) The Tx UE transmits Uu DRX-config parameters configured by the base station and offset (granularity is slot) between the SFN and the DFN, or b) the Tx UE converts the Uu DRX parameters into DRX-config parameters capable of obtaining the DFN, and then transmits the Uu DRX-config parameters to the Rx UE; c) The gap may be a maximum value gap_max and/or a minimum value gap_min of a gap table configured by the base station for the Tx UE through an RRC message or a value calculated through both gap_max and gap_min.
It should be understood that, in various embodiments of the present application, the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes do not mean the order of execution, and the order of execution of the processes should be determined by the functions and internal logic thereof, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
It will be clear to those skilled in the art that, for convenience and brevity of description, specific working procedures of the above-described systems, apparatuses and units may refer to corresponding procedures in the foregoing method embodiments, and are not repeated herein.
In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative, e.g., the division of the units is merely a logical function division, and there may be additional divisions when actually implemented, e.g., multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be omitted or not performed. Alternatively, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed with each other may be an indirect coupling or communication connection via some interfaces, devices or units, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other form.
The units described as separate units may or may not be physically separate, and units shown as units may or may not be physical units, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on a plurality of network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
In addition, each functional unit in the embodiments of the present application may be integrated in one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated in one unit.
In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When loaded and executed on a computer, produces a flow or function in accordance with embodiments of the present application, in whole or in part. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable apparatus. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another, for example, by wired (e.g., coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital Subscriber Line (DSL)), or wireless (e.g., infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device including one or more servers, data centers, etc. that can be integrated with the available medium. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (e.g., floppy disk, hard disk, tape), an optical medium (e.g., DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., solid State Drive (SSD)), etc.
The various illustrative logical blocks and circuits described in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be implemented or performed with a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic, discrete hardware components, or any combination thereof designed to perform the functions described herein. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, but in the alternative, the general purpose processor may be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller, or state machine. A processor may also be implemented as a combination of computing devices, e.g., a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, a plurality of microprocessors, one or more microprocessors in conjunction with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration.
The steps of a method or algorithm described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein may be embodied directly in hardware, in a software unit executed by a processor, or in a combination of the two. The software units may be stored in random access Memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), flash Memory, read-Only Memory (ROM), EPROM Memory, EEPROM Memory, registers, hard disk, a removable disk, a CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art. In an example, a storage medium may be coupled to the processor such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. In the alternative, the storage medium may be integral to the processor. The processor and the storage medium may reside in an ASIC.
These computer program instructions may also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to cause a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable apparatus to produce a computer implemented process such that the instructions which execute on the computer or other programmable apparatus provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flowchart flow or flows and/or block diagram block or blocks.
Those skilled in the art will appreciate that in one or more of the examples described above, the functions described in the present application may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, these functions may be stored on or transmitted over as one or more instructions or code on a computer-readable medium. Computer-readable media includes both computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another. A storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by a general purpose or special purpose computer.
Although the application has been described in connection with specific features and embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that various modifications and combinations can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, the specification and drawings are merely exemplary illustrations of the present application as defined in the appended claims and are considered to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations, or equivalents that fall within the scope of the application. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various modifications and variations can be made to the present application without departing from the scope of the application. Thus, it is intended that the present application also include such modifications and alterations insofar as they come within the scope of the appended claims or the equivalents thereof.

Claims (25)

1. A communication method, applied to a first terminal, comprising:
Obtaining first configuration information, wherein the first configuration information comprises: a first DRX parameter and a first time interval, where the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and a network device, and the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between receiving downlink control information by the first terminal and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal;
And sending the first configuration information to the second terminal, wherein the first configuration information is used for obtaining a second DRX parameter of the second terminal, and the second DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the parameters of the first DRX comprise: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the parameters of the first DRX comprise: and based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN, wherein the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN is obtained through the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the SFN.
4. A method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the method further comprises:
receiving first indication information from the second terminal, wherein the first indication information is used for indicating any one of the following:
the second terminal is not connected with other terminals in a sideways way;
The second terminal is connected with other terminals in a sideways way;
And the second terminal is connected with N terminals in a sideways way, and N is a positive integer.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein the method further comprises:
when the second terminal and other terminals have lateral connection, fourth configuration information from the second terminal is received,
The fourth configuration information is used for indicating parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
6. The method of claim 5, wherein transmitting the first configuration information to the second terminal comprises:
And sending the first configuration information to the second terminal according to the first indication information or the fourth configuration information.
7. The method of claim 5, wherein the first indication information is located in the same message as the fourth configuration information.
8. The method of claim 4, wherein the method further comprises:
Sending second adjustment information to the network device, wherein the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network device to adjust the parameter of the first DRX;
And receiving the adjusted parameter of the first DRX from the network equipment, wherein the adjusted parameter of the first DRX is determined according to the second adjustment information.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein the method further comprises:
and receiving first adjustment information from the second terminal, wherein the first adjustment information is used for requesting to adjust the parameter of the first DRX.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further to indicate:
and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
11. The method of claim 8, wherein at least one of the following is located in the same message:
The first indication information, fourth configuration information or the second adjustment information, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
12. The method of claim 9, wherein at least one of the following is located in the same message:
The first indication information, fourth configuration information or the first adjustment information, where the fourth configuration information is used to indicate parameters of DRX of the other terminal, and the parameters of DRX of the other terminal are used for the second terminal to communicate with the other terminal.
13. A communication method, applied to a second terminal, comprising:
receiving first configuration information from a first terminal, the first configuration information comprising: a first DRX parameter and a first time interval, where the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and a network device, and the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between receiving downlink control information by the first terminal and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal;
And sending a second DRX parameter of the second terminal to the first terminal, wherein the second DRX parameter is determined according to the first configuration information, and the second DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal.
14. The method of claim 13, wherein the parameters of the first DRX comprise: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
15. A method of communication, for use with a network device, comprising:
Transmitting a first DRX parameter to a first terminal, wherein the first DRX parameter is used for the first terminal to obtain first configuration information, and the first configuration information comprises: a first DRX parameter and a first time interval, where the first DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and a network device, the first time interval is at least one of a time interval range between receiving downlink control information by the first terminal and sending sidestream control information to a second terminal, the first configuration information is used for obtaining a second DRX parameter of the second terminal, and the second DRX parameter is used for communication between the first terminal and the second terminal;
parameters of a second DRX from the second terminal are received.
16. The method of claim 15, wherein the parameters of the first DRX comprise: based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal represented by the system frame number SFN and the time slot offset between the SFN and the direct frame number DFN.
17. The method of claim 16, wherein the parameters of the first DRX comprise: and based on the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN, wherein the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the DFN is obtained through the DRX parameter of the first terminal expressed by the SFN.
18. The method of any one of claims 15-17, wherein the method further comprises:
Receiving second adjustment information from the first terminal, wherein the second adjustment information is used for requesting the network equipment to adjust the parameter of the first DRX;
and sending the adjusted parameter of the first DRX to the first terminal, wherein the adjusted parameter of the first DRX is determined according to the second adjustment information.
19. The method of claim 18, wherein either the first adjustment information or the second adjustment information is further used to indicate:
and the parameter configuration of the second DRX fails, preference information of the parameter of the first DRX, or the parameter of the second DRX.
20. The method of claim 1, 13 or 15, wherein the parameter of the first DRX comprises a period of the first DRX and the parameter of the second DRX comprises a period of the second DRX;
The period of the second DRX is a multiple of the period of the first DRX.
21. The method of claim 1, 13 or 15, wherein the parameter of the first DRX comprises an active period length of the first DRX and the parameter of the second DRX comprises an active period length of the second DRX;
The active period length of the second DRX is greater than or equal to the active period length of the first DRX.
22. The method of claim 21, wherein the active period of the second DRX is determined based on the active period of the first DRX and at least one of: and the maximum value of the time intervals in the first time interval and the minimum value of the time intervals in the first time interval.
23. The method of claim 1, 13 or 15, wherein a start time of the second DRX is determined based on a start time of the first DRX and the first time interval.
24. A communication device, comprising: a processor and a communication interface for the apparatus to communicate, the processor being coupled with a memory for storing a program or instructions which, when executed by the processor, cause the apparatus to perform the method of any one of claims 1-12, or to perform the method of any one of claims 13-14, or to perform the method of any one of claims 15-23.
25. A computer readable storage medium having instructions stored therein which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the method of any of claims 1-23.
CN202110183755.XA 2021-01-14 2021-02-08 Communication method and device Active CN114765840B (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/137070 WO2022151885A1 (en) 2021-01-14 2021-12-10 Communication method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110051206 2021-01-14
CN2021100512067 2021-01-14

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN114765840A CN114765840A (en) 2022-07-19
CN114765840B true CN114765840B (en) 2024-06-14

Family

ID=82364656

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN202110183755.XA Active CN114765840B (en) 2021-01-14 2021-02-08 Communication method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114765840B (en)
WO (1) WO2022151885A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108307486A (en) * 2016-08-11 2018-07-20 索尼公司 Electronic equipment and method for network-control end and network node
PL3780673T3 (en) * 2018-06-29 2022-11-28 Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. Data transmission method and terminal device
US20220417854A1 (en) * 2019-06-19 2022-12-29 Lg Electronics Inc. Ue operation method related to sidelink drx in wireless communication system
CN111800894A (en) * 2019-08-22 2020-10-20 维沃移动通信有限公司 DRX configuration method and device of sidelink
CN111800764B (en) * 2019-08-22 2022-05-13 维沃移动通信有限公司 Method and device for configuring side link DRX (discontinuous reception) parameters and terminal equipment
CN111699723B (en) * 2020-02-13 2022-12-09 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Communication processing method and device, and storage medium
CN111480391B (en) * 2020-03-13 2023-11-07 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Direct link data transmission method, device and storage medium
CN111556590B (en) * 2020-04-13 2022-07-19 中国信息通信研究院 Side link discontinuous receiving method

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Discussion on DRX for sidelink;OPPO;3GPP TSG-RAN WG2#112-e;20201023(R2-2008772);全文 *
Some considerations about DRX on PC5;Huawei, Hisilicon;3GPP TSG RAN WG2#98;20170519(R2-1704718);全文 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114765840A (en) 2022-07-19
WO2022151885A1 (en) 2022-07-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102295532B1 (en) Link Aggregation with Floating Main Links
KR102456846B1 (en) Method for discovering access point in wireless local area network and apparatus for the same
EP3395114B1 (en) Channel access procedure and qos provisioning for uplink laa
KR102101603B1 (en) Access points, communication methods and integrated circuits
JP7490067B2 (en) Method and device for power conservation in wireless sidelink communications - Patents.com
US20200337110A1 (en) Method and apparatus for low power consumption operation of terminal in mobile communication system
US10050746B2 (en) System and method for orthogonal frequency division multiple access power-saving poll transmission
CN109587705B (en) Communication method, device and system
KR20210100732A (en) Signal transmission method, priority configuration method and apparatus
KR20220153024A (en) Method and device for power saving in wireless sidelink communication
US20130308524A1 (en) Distributed interference management algorithm
CN112166646A (en) Method and apparatus for reducing power consumption of terminal in wireless communication system
TWI722606B (en) Method for power profile adaptation methodand user equipments thereof
US11178660B2 (en) Determining access slot for communications on radio interface
CN112106423A (en) Method, terminal equipment and base station for physical downlink control channel monitoring
CN111247867B (en) New radio beam management reporting operation with connected mode discontinuous reception
CA3109422C (en) Network-assisted clear channel assessment bandwidth adaptation mechanism
JP7345041B2 (en) Channel state indication method, apparatus and storage medium on unlicensed spectrum
CN114765840B (en) Communication method and device
US20230171740A1 (en) Resource collision avoidance in sidelink for discontinuous reception (drx)
KR20190062318A (en) Operation method of communication node supporting low power mode in wireless local area network
KR20220069853A (en) Method and apparatus for paging in sidelink communication
KR20200121726A (en) Method and apparatus for low power consumption operation of terminal in mobile communication system
KR20200119721A (en) Method and apparatus for reconfiguring bandwidth part for groupcast in sidelink communication
RU2799488C1 (en) Method, device for indicating the state of channels in the unlicensed spectrum and information carrier

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
GR01 Patent grant